Anda di halaman 1dari 268

S9300&S9300E Series Switches

Hardware Installation and


Maintenance Guide

Issue 06
Date 2015-10-23

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide About This Document

About This Document

Intended Audience
This document describes hardware installation procedures for the S9300&S9300E series
switches, troubleshooting methods for common hardware faults, and switch maintenance
instructions.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
l Hardware installation engineers
l Commissioning engineers
l Onsite maintenance engineers
l System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.

NOTE Calls attention to important information,


best practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment
damage, and environment deterioration.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

&<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n


times.

# A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Declaration
This manual is only a reference for you to configure your devices. The contents in the manual,
such as web pages, command line syntax, and command outputs, are based on the device

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide About This Document

conditions in the lab. The manual provides instructions for general scenarios, but do not cover
all usage scenarios of all product models. The contents in the manual may be different from
your actual device situations due to the differences in software versions, models, and
configuration files. The manual will not list every possible difference. You should configure
your devices according to actual situations.
The specifications provided in this manual are tested in lab environment (for example, the
tested device has been installed with a certain type of boards or only one protocol is run on
the device). Results may differ from the listed specifications when you attempt to obtain the
maximum values with multiple functions enabled on the device.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)
The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 05 (2015-07-31)
The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 04 (2015-02-12)
The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 03 (2014-05-25)
The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 02 (2014-03-20)
The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 01 (2013-10-30)
This is the first official release.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Switches Overview........................................................................................................................1
2 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................4
3 Preparing for Installation.............................................................................................................6
3.1 Reading the Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Checking the Installation Site.........................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack.......................................................................................................................................... 10
3.4 Checking the Power Distribution Environment............................................................................................................13
3.4.1 DC Power Supply...................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.4.2 AC Power Supply...................................................................................................................................................... 34
3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories............................................................................................................... 59

4 Unpacking a Switch.................................................................................................................... 65
4.1 Unpacking a Crate........................................................................................................................................................ 66
4.2 Unpacking a Carton...................................................................................................................................................... 67
4.3 Unpacking a Card......................................................................................................................................................... 69

5 Installing Switches...................................................................................................................... 71
5.1 Installing S9303&S9303E Chassis............................................................................................................................... 72
5.2 Installing S9306&S9306E Chassis............................................................................................................................... 78
5.3 Installing S9312&S9312E Chassis............................................................................................................................... 83

6 Installing Modules...................................................................................................................... 90
6.1 Installing a Power Module............................................................................................................................................91
6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard......................................................... 92
6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card................................................................................................................ 94
6.4 Installing a Card............................................................................................................................................................96
6.5 Installing Cable Management Frames........................................................................................................................ 100

7 Connecting Switches.................................................................................................................102
7.1 Connecting Power Cables...........................................................................................................................................103
7.1.1 Connecting DC Power Cables................................................................................................................................. 103
7.1.2 Connecting AC Power Cables................................................................................................................................. 109
7.2 Connecting Network Cables....................................................................................................................................... 114

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide Contents

7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables.................................................................................................................................. 117


7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers....................................................................................... 122

8 Post-Installation Checking...................................................................................................... 129


9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time.............................................................................. 132
10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide.................................................................................................. 136
10.1 S9300 Clustering Using CSS Cards......................................................................................................................... 137
10.2 S300E Clustering Using CSS Cards......................................................................................................................... 139
10.3 S9300&S9300E Clustering Using Service Ports......................................................................................................142

11 Maintaining Switches.............................................................................................................144
11.1 Replacing a Power Module.......................................................................................................................................145
11.2 Replacing a Fan Module........................................................................................................................................... 150
11.3 Replacing a Service Card..........................................................................................................................................154
11.4 Replacing an MPU....................................................................................................................................................156
11.4.1 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Interrupted)........................................................................156
11.4.2 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Still Running).................................................................... 158
11.4.3 Replacing One of the MPUs on a Switch.............................................................................................................. 160
11.5 Replacing an Optical Module................................................................................................................................... 163
11.6 Replacing an Air Filter............................................................................................................................................. 165

12 Hardware Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 169


12.1 A Card Resets Unexpectedly.................................................................................................................................... 170
12.2 A Card Fails to Register........................................................................................................................................... 172
12.3 Files Cannot Be Written into the CF Card................................................................................................................174
12.4 A Power Module Does Not Work Normally............................................................................................................ 175

13 Appendix................................................................................................................................... 180
13.1 Appendix A List of Indicators.................................................................................................................................. 181
13.2 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation............................................................................................. 183
13.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions................................................................................................................................. 183
13.2.2 Assembling Power Cables..................................................................................................................................... 184
13.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables..................................................................................................................................193
13.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories..................................................................................................................................207
13.2.5 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool.............................................................................................................223
13.3 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation............................................................................226
13.3.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room........................................................................................ 226
13.3.2 Requirements for Power Supply............................................................................................................................234
13.4 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications.................................................................................................. 237
13.4.1 General Grounding Specifications.........................................................................................................................237
13.4.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room.............................................................................................. 237
13.4.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices...................................................................................................................237
13.4.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply.............................................................................238
13.4.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables......................................................................................................... 239

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide Contents

13.4.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables................................................................................................. 239


13.5 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables............................................................................................................. 240
13.5.1 Introduction to Labels............................................................................................................................................240
13.5.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers...................................................................................................................248
13.5.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables............................................................................................................... 251
13.5.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables...................................................................................................................... 252
13.5.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables................................................................................................................... 253
13.6 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules.......................................................................................................... 256
13.7 Appendix G Fault Tag.............................................................................................................................................. 259

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 1 Switches Overview

1 Switches Overview

NOTE
The figures in this document are for reference only.

S9300 Series
The S9300 series is available in three models: S9303, S9306, and S9312. Figure 1-1 shows
the three chassis models.

Figure 1-1 S9303, S9306, and S9312 chassis

RUN/ALM

S9312 44 75
46 47
Quidway 38 39
40 41
42 43
RUN/ALM
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47
8 44 75
6 9 42 43
4 7 40 41
2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47
8 9 44 75
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
RUN/ALM 4 5 38 39
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27 ETH
24 25
22 23 CON
20 21
18 19 CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
16 17 CLK1
14 15
46 47 12 13
10 11 RST
44 75 8
42 43 6 9
S9306 40 41 RUN/ALM 4 7
38 39 5
Quidway 34 35
36 37
1
2 3
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25 RUN/ALM ETH
22 23 CON
20 21
18 19 CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
16 17 CLK1
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75 RST
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
2 3 36 37 RUN/ALM
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25 RUN/ALM
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47 46 47
8 9 44 75 44 75
6 7 42 43 42 43
4 5 40 41 40 41
2 3 38 39 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37 36 37
34 35 34 35
32 33 32 33
30 31 30 31
28 29 28 29
26 27 ETH 26 27
24 25 24 25
22 23 CON
20 21 22 23
18 19 CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM 20 21
16 17 CLK1 18 19
14 15 16 17
12 13 14 15
10 11 RST 12 13 46 47
8 9 10 11 44 75
6 8 9 42 43
4 7 6 7 40 41
2 5 4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
3 2 3 36 37
1 1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
RUN/ALM ETH 26 27
CON 24 25
22 23
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM 20 21
CLK1
18 19
16 17
14 15
RST 12 13
10 11 46 47
8 44 75
6 9 42 43
RUN/ALM 4 7 40 41
2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
RUN/ALM 26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
46 47 12 13
44 75 10 11 46 47
42 43 8 9 44 75
40 41 RUN/ALM 6 42 43
38 39 4 7 40 41
36 37 2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
34 35 3 36 37
32 33 1 34 35
30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31
26 27 28 29
24 25 26 27
22 23 24 25
20 21 22 23
18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19
14 15 16 17
12 13 46 47 14 15
10 11 44 75 12 13 46 47
8 9 42 43 10 11 44 75
6 7 40 41 8 9 42 43
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM 6 7 40 41
2 3 36 37 4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 34 35 2 3 36 37
32 33 1 34 35
30 31 32 33
RUN/ALM
S9303 28 29 30 31
Quidway 26 27 28 29
24 25 26 27
22 23 24 25
20 21 22 23
18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19
14 15 16 17
12 13 14 15
10 11 46 47 12 13
8 9 44 75 10 11 46 47
6 42 43 8 44 75
4 7 40 41 6 9 42 43
2 5 38 39 4 7 40 41
44 75
46 47 1
3 36 37 PoE4 2 3
5
36 37
38 39 PoE4
34 35 1
42 43 32 33 PoE3 34 35
40 41 RUN/ALM 30 31 32 33 PoE3
38 39 28 29 30 31
36 37 26 27 PoE2 28 29
34 35 24 25 26 27 PoE2
32 33 22 23 24 25
30 31 20 21 PoE1 22 23 PoE1
28 29 18 19 20 21
26 27 16 17 18 19
24 25 14 15 CMU 16 17 CMU
22 23 12 13 14 15
20 21 10 11 12 13
18 19 8 9 10 11
16 17 6 7 PWR4 8 9 PWR4
14 15 4 5 6 7
12 13 46 47 2 4
10 11 44 75 RUN/ALM 1
3
SLAVE PWR3 2 3
5
SLAVE
PWR3
8 9 42 43 1
6 7 40 41 PWR2 PWR2
4 5 38 39
2 3 36 37
1
32 33
34 35 PWR1 PWR1
30 31 MASTER MASTER
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17 46 47
14 15 44 75
12 13 42 43
10 11 40 41
8 9 38 39
6 36 37
RS485

7
RS485

4 5 34 35
RS485

2
RS485

3 32 33
1 30 31
28 29
26 27 ≤45 ≤75
24 25 kg(99 kg(165
lb)

20 21
22 23 ACT RUN/ALM lb)
18 19
16 17 ETH
14 15
MON

12 13 CON
MON
MON

MON

10 11 MON
8 9 RS485
6 7
4 5
2 3
FAULT

1
ALM

ACT RUN/ALM ON
RUN

RUN
ETH P CMUA CMUA ON
CON CMUA CMUA RUN
ALM
MON O
FAULT

OFF

RS485 ALM
E ON
ALM

ON FAULT
ON
RUN

≤25 RUN
kg(55 RUN
lb) ON ON FAULT
P RUN
RUN
OFF
ON ALM ON
W RUN 2 RUN
ALM 2 OFF
ALM 1 1
OFF

R ON ON ALM
RUN FAULT RUN FAULT
ON

ALM
2 FAULT
ALM
P ALM
OFF FAULT
OFF
FAULT ALM
W OFF FAULT OFF
R FAULT OFF FAULT OFF
1 OFF OFF

S9303 S9306 S9312

Table 1-1 lists the specifications of the S9300 series switches.

Table 1-1 Specifications of the S9300 series switches

Model S9303 S9306 S9312

Height 175 mm (4 U) 441.7 mm (10 U) 663.95 mm (15 U)

W x D (without l With cable management frames: 442 mm x 585 mm


mounting brackets) l Without cable management frames: 442 mm x 489 mm

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 1 Switches Overview

Weight (empty/ 10 kg/22 kg 15 kg/42 kg 25 kg/70 kg


fully loaded)

Maximum power 1000 W 2200 W 4200 W


consumption (fully
loaded, without
PoE power supply)

Power parameters l DC input voltage


– Rated voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC
– Maximum voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC
l AC input voltage
– Rated voltage: 110 V AC/220 V AC, 50/60 Hz
– Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to 290 V AC; 47 Hz to 63
Hz (The output power reduces to half of the maximum
output when the input voltage is in the range of 90 V AC to
175 V AC.)

Environment l Operating temperature and altitude:


parameters – -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to 45°C
– 1800 m to 4000 m: Temperature decreases by 1°C every time
the altitude increases 220 m.
– 4000 m: 0°C to 35°C
l Operating relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH
(noncondensing)
l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C
l Storage altitude: < 5000 m
l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)

S9300E Series
The S9300E series is available in three models: S9303E, S9306E, and S9312E. Figure 1-2
shows the three chassis models.

Figure 1-2 S9303E, S9306E, and S9312E chassis

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
S9312E 36 37
38 39
40 41
42 43
RUN/ALM
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47
8 44 75
6 9 42 43
4 7 40 41
2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47
8 9 44 75
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
RUN/ALM 4 5 38 39
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27 ETH
24 25 CON
22 23
20 21 CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
18 19
16 17 CLK1
14 15
12 13 RST
46 47 10 11
44 75 8 9
42 43 6 7
40 41 RUN/ALM 4 5
38 39
S9306E 36 37 1
2 3
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29 ETH
26 27
24 25 CON
22 23
20 21 CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
18 19 CLK1
16 17
14 15
12 13 46 47 RST
10 11 44 75
8 9 42 43
6 7 40 41
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM RUN/ALM
2 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47 46 47
8 9 44 75 44 75
6 7 42 43 42 43
4 5 40 41 40 41
2 3 38 39 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37 36 37
34 35 34 35
32 33 32 33
30 31 30 31
28 29 ETH 28 29
26 27 26 27
24 25 CON 24 25
22 23 22 23
20 21 CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM 20 21
18 19 CLK1 18 19
16 17 16 17
14 15 14 15
12 13 RST 12 13
10 11 10 11 46 47
8 9 8 44 75
6 7 6 9 42 43
4 5 4 7 40 41
2 3 2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
ETH 28 29
CON 26 27
24 25
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
22 23
20 21
CLK1 18 19
16 17
RST 14 15
12 13
10 11 46 47
8 44 75
6 9 42 43
RUN/ALM 4 7 40 41
2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
46 47 12 13
44 75 10 11 46 47
42 43 8 9 44 75
40 41 6 7 42 43
38 39 RUN/ALM 4 5 40 41
36 37 2 3 38 39 RUN/ALM
34 35 1 36 37
32 33 34 35
30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31
26 27 28 29
24 25 26 27
22 23 24 25
20 21 22 23
18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19
14 15 16 17
12 13 14 15
10 11 46 47 12 13
8 44 75 10 11 46 47
9 42 43 8 44 75
6 7 40 41 6 9 42 43
4 5 38 39 RUN/ALM 4 7 40 41
2 3 36 37 2 5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 34 35 3 36 37
32 33 1 34 35
RUN/ALM 30 31 32 33
28 29 30 31
S9303E 24 25
26 27
26 27
28 29
22 23 24 25
20 21 22 23
18 19 20 21
16 17 18 19
14 15 16 17
12 13 14 15
10 11 46 47 12 13 46 47
8 9 44 75 10 11 44 75
6 7 42 43 8 9 42 43
4 5 40 41 6 7 40 41
2 3 38 39 4 5 38 39
46 47 36 37 2 36 37
44 75 1 34 35 3
42 43 32 33 1 34 35
40 41 RUN/ALM 30 31 32 33
38 39 28 29 30 31
36 37 26 27 28 29 PWR6
34 35 24 25 26 27
32 33 22 23 24 25
30 31 20 21 22 23 PWR5
28 29 18 19 20 21
26 27 16 17 18 19
24 25 14 15 CMU 14 15
16 17 CMU
22 23 12 13 12 13
20 21 10 11
18 19 8 9 PWR4 10 11 PWR4
16 17 6 8 9
14 15 4 7 6 7
12 13 46 47 2 5 PWR3 4 5 PWR3
10 11 44 75 3 2 3
8 42 43 RUN/ALM 1 1
9
4
6 7 38 39
40 41 PWR2 PWR2
2 5 36 37
3 PWR1 PWR1
1 34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17 46 47
14 15 44 75
12 13 42 43
10 11 40 41
8 9 38 39
RS485

6 36 37
RS485

7
RS485

4 5
RS485

2 34 35
3 32 33
1 30 31
28 29
26 27 ≤45 ≤75
kg(165
24 25 kg(99 lb)

20 21
22 23 ACT RUN/ALM lb)
18 19
16 17 ETH
MON

14 15
MON

MON

12 13 CON
MON

10 11 MON
8 9 RS485
6 7
4 5
2 3
FAULT

1
ACT RUN/ALM
ALM
RUN

CMUA
CMUA CMUA
CON
ETH CMUA
MON
FAULT

RS485
OFF

ON ON
ALM

ON
RUN

≤25 RUN RUN


kg(55
lb) ON ON
P RUN RUN
ON ALM 2 ON ALM
2
W RUN
1 RUN
1
OFF

ALM
R ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ALM
FAULT
FAULT
ON

2 ALM ALM
FAULT FAULT OFF
P ALM
OFF ALM
W FAULT OFF FAULT OFF
R FAULT OFF FAULT OFF
1 OFF
OFF

S9303E S9306E S9312E

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 1 Switches Overview

Table 1-2 lists the specifications of the S9300E series switches.

Table 1-2 Specifications of the S9300E series switches


Model S9303E S9306E S9312E

Height 175 mm (4 U) 441.7 mm (10 U) 663.95 mm (15 U)

W x D (without l With cable management frames: 442 mm x 585 mm


mounting brackets) l Without cable management frames: 442 mm x 489 mm

Weight (empty/ 11 kg/25 kg 29 kg/45 kg 37 kg/70 kg


fully loaded)

Maximum power 1100 W 2400 W 4500 W


consumption (fully
loaded)

Power parameters l DC input voltage


– Rated voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC
– Maximum voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC
l AC input voltage
– Rated voltage: 110 V AC/220 V AC, 50/60 Hz
– Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to 290 V AC; 47 Hz to 63
Hz (The output power reduces to half of the maximum
output when the input voltage is in the range of 90 V AC to
175 V AC.)

Environment l Operating temperature and altitude:


parameters – -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to 45°C
– 1800 m to 4000 m: Temperature decreases by 1°C every time
the altitude increases 220 m.
– 4000 m: 0°C to 35°C
l Operating relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH
(noncondensing)
l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C
l Storage altitude: < 5000 m
l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 2 Installation Procedure

2 Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure
Figure 2-1 shows the switch installation flowchart.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 2 Installation Procedure

Figure 2-1 Installation flowchart

Start

Prepare for
installation

Unpack the switch

Install the switch

Install modules

Connect the switch

Complete post-
installation checking

Power on the switch

End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

3 Preparing for Installation

About This Chapter

3.1 Reading the Safety Precautions


3.2 Checking the Installation Site
3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack
3.4 Checking the Power Distribution Environment
3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

3.1 Reading the Safety Precautions


Read and follow all the safety cautions and instructions on the chassis or described in this
document to ensure personal and equipment safety during installation, operation, and
maintenance.
NOTICE, CAUTION, and DANGER items in this document do not cover all the safety
precautions and are only supplementary to general safety precautions.
Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations correctly and
safely.

General Safety Guidelines

DANGER
In case of fire, immediately leave the building or equipment deployment site and press the fire
alarm button or call the fire department. Never enter the building on fire again in any
situation.

CAUTION
l Before performing any operation on a switch, wear ESD clothing and ESD gloves or an
ESD wrist strap. Remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch to avoid electric
shock or burn.
l After installing the switch on a cabinet/rack, connect the ground cable to the chassis before
any operations on the chassis and remove the ground cable only after you remove all the
other components and cables from the chassis.

Environmental Safety

DANGER
Do not place or operate the switch in an environment with flammable or explosive gases or
smoke.

CAUTION
l Keep the switch away from water or dampness to prevent damages to circuits.
l The switch heats up during operation. The installation site must be well ventilated to
ensure normal operation of the switch.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Electrical Safety

DANGER
l Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through damp objects
can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result in fire, electric shock, or
other accidents.
l Never install or remove the switch or power cables while the power is on. The electric arc
or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may cause fire or eye damage.
l To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the switch before powering it on.

Laser Safety

CAUTION
l Invisible laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into open optical ports without
eye protection.
l After unplugging an optical fiber, cover the fiber connectors with dust caps.

Mechanical Safety

CAUTION
l Wear gloves to protect your hands from sharp edges when you are moving the chassis.
l Before carrying a heavy object, use appropriate tools to protect yourself from bruises or
sprains.
l Before pulling the chassis out of the cabinet/rack, check whether there are any unstable or
heavy objects on the cabinet. Be careful not to make the objects fall, which may cause
bodily injury.
l Do not drill holes on a cabinet without permission. Unqualified holes on a cabinet affect
the electromagnetic filter performance of the cabinet and cause damages to the cables in
the cabinet. In addition, metal scraps may fall into the cabinet when you are drilling holes,
causing short circuits on printed circuit boards (PCBs).

3.2 Checking the Installation Site

Checking the Site Temperature, Humidity, and Altitude


The S9300&S9300E series switches are used indoors. Ensure that the temperature, humidity,
and altitude in the installation site meet the following requirements:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

l The switches must be installed in a clean, dry, well ventilated site with a stable
temperature. The installation site must be free from leaking or dripping water, heavy
dew, and humidity.
l Dustproof measures must be taken at the site. Dust will cause electrostatic discharges on
the chassis and affect connections of metal connectors and joints. This shortens the
service life and may cause failures of the switches.
l The temperature and humidity at the site must be within acceptable ranges. For the
operating temperature and relative humidity ranges required by the S9300&S9300E
series switches, see 1 Switches Overview. If the relative humidity exceeds 70%, use
dehumidifiers or air conditioners with dehumidification features.
l There must be no acidic, alkaline, or other corrosive gases at the installation site.
l Keep the switches away from direct sunlight.
l Leave at least 50 mm clearance at the two sides and rear of the switch for heat
dissipation.

Measuring the Ground Resistance

NOTICE
l Do not measure the ground resistance immediately after a rain.
l The ground resistance in the equipment room should be lower than 1 ohm. In special
cases, the ground resistance should be no more than 5 ohms (no more than 10 ohms in an
area with high soil resistivity).
l The current probe and voltage probe of the ground resistance tester must be vertical to a
power line or an underground metal pipe.

Use a ground resistance tester to measure the ground resistance. Figure 3-1 shows how to
place the current and voltage probes of the tester.

Figure 3-1 Positions of the current and voltage probes


Ground grid
Voltage probe Current probe

d2
d1

Pay attention to the following points when measuring the ground resistance:

l The distance between the current probe and edge of the ground grid is d1, which is 4 to 5
times the maximum diagonal length (D) of the ground grid.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

l The distance between the voltage probe and edge of the ground grid is d2, which is 50%
to 60% of d1.
l Move the voltage probe along the line between the ground grid and current probe three
times, over a certain distance (5% of d1) each time. If the resistance values obtained in
the three movements are similar, the ground resistance is normal.
NOTE

If the current probe cannot be placed over a distance of d1 away from the ground grid, change the
distance in this way: In an area with equal soil resistivity, take 2D instead of d1 and take D instead of d2.
In an area with unequal soil resistivity, take 3D instead of d1 and take 1.7D instead of d2.

3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack


The S9300&S9300E series switches can be installed in a standard 19-inch cabinet/rack. Table
3-1 describes the requirements for a cabinet.

Table 3-1 Requirements on the cabinet/rack for S9300&S9300E installation

Model Required Height Required Depth Other


Requirements

S9303&S9303E ≥5U ≥ 600 mm l A cabinet with


NOTE posts in the
S9306&S9306E ≥ 11 U When a 600-mm middle is not
deep cabinet is used, recommended
ensure that the because the posts
cabinet doors are
single-swing doors.
reduce the
number of cables
allowed in the
cabinet/rack.
l There must be
guide rails or a
tray in the
cabinet to
support the
chassis.
l It is
recommended
that the distance
from the front
mounting rails to
the interior side
of the front door
(distance a) be
68 mm, 95 mm,
100 mm, or 193
mm. The
distance from the
card panels with
cables connected
to the interior

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Model Required Height Required Depth Other


Requirements

S9312&S9312E ≥ 16 U side of the front


door must be
larger than or
equal to 110 mm.
Otherwise, the
number of cables
allowed on the
switch may be
reduced or the
front door may
be unable to be
closed.

Huawei offers N66E and N68E cabinets for the S9300&S9300E series switches. Table 3-2
lists the physical parameters of the cabinets. Figure 3-2 shows an N66E cabinet, and Figure
3-3 shows an N68E cabinet.

Table 3-2 Physical parameters of N66E and N68E cabinets


Model Dimensions Height Distance a (from
the Front
Mounting Rails to
the Interior Side
of the Front Door)

N66E 600 mm x 600 mm x 46 U 95 mm by default


2200 mm (W x D x and can be adjusted
H) to 68 mm or 193
mm

N68E 600 mm x 800 mm x 46 U 100 mm by default


2200 mm (W x D x and can be adjusted
H) to 68 mm or 193
mm

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-2 N66E cabinet


600mm
Front mounting rail Rear mounting rail

2200mm
a

600mm

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-3 N68E cabinet


Front mounting rail Rear mounting rail 600mm

2200mm
a

800mm

3.4 Checking the Power Distribution Environment

3.4.1 DC Power Supply

Power Supply Configuration Without Power Distribution Boxes

Table 3-3 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and
configurations of the DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-3 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches
Device Model Maximum Power System Power PoE Power
Power Module Module Module
Consumption Configuration Configuration
of Chassis (Applicable
Only to
V200R006C00
and Later
Versions)

S9303 1000 W 1600 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable in


power module (recommended PoE power slots
)

2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1 1+0


power module (recommended
)

2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable in


power module (recommended PoE power slots
)

S9306 2200 W 1600 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable in


power module (recommended PoE power slots
)

2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


power module (recommended 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
), 2+0, 2+1, 2+2 3+1, 4+0

2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable in


power module (recommended PoE power slots
)

S9312 4200 W 1600 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable in


power module (recommended PoE power slots
)

2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


power module 2+1 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
(recommended) 3+1, 4+0
, 2+2

2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable in


power module (recommended PoE power slots
)

Table 3-4 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and
configurations of the DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-4 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches
Device Model Maximum Power Power Module Power Module
Consumption of Configuration
Chassis

S9303E 1100 W 2200 W DC power 1+0, 1+1


module (recommended)

2400 W DC power 1+0, 1+1


module (recommended)

S9306E 2400 W 2200 W DC power 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1


module (recommended), 2+2

2400 W DC power 1+0, 1+1


module (recommended)

S9312E 4500 W 2200 W DC power 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1,


module 2+2, 3+0, 3+1
(recommended),
3+3, 4+0, 4+1

2400 W DC power 1+0, 1+1


module (recommended)

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch.

NOTE

l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or
the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to
your needs.
l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as
PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC
power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.
l As shown in Figure 3-4:
– Two system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 1+1 redundancy mode.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the
S9300 works in 1+0 mode.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-4 1+1 redundancy of power modules


DC PDF Switch

DC power module 1
Circuit Line a
breaker A

DC power module 2
Circuit Line b
breaker B

2200W DC PoE
Circuit Line c power module
breaker C

l Figure 3-5 shows the 2+2 redundancy of power modules.


– Two system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 2+2 redundancy mode.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the
S9300 works in 2+2 mode.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-5 2+2 redundancy of power modules


DC PDF Switch

DC power module 1
Circuit Line a
breaker A

DC power module 2
Circuit Line b
breaker B

DC power module 3
Circuit Line c
breaker C

Circuit DC power module 4


Line d
breaker D

2200W DC
Circuit Line e PoE power module 1
breaker E
2200W DC
Circuit Line f PoE power module 2
breaker F

2200W DC
Circuit Line g PoE power module 3
breaker G

2200W DC
Circuit Line h PoE power module 4
breaker H

l (Only for S9312E) Figure 3-6 shows the 3+3 redundancy of power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-6 3+3 redundancy of power modules

DC PDF Switch

DC power module 1
Circuit Line a
breaker A

DC power module 2
Circuit Line b
breaker B

DC power module 3
Circuit Line c
breaker C

DC power module 4
Circuit Line d
breaker D

DC power module 5
Circuit Line e
breaker E

DC power module 6
Circuit Line f
breaker F

Table 3-5 describes the requirements for DC power distribution

Table 3-5 Requirements for DC power distribution


Power Technica Power Maximu Number Circuit Output
Module l Cable m Power of Inputs Breaker Terminal
Specifica Cross- Supply Rated Type on
tions Sectional Distance Current Power
Area Distribut
ion
Device

1600 W l Rated 6 mm2 11 m Two -48 The OT


DC power input V/-60 V required terminals
module voltage inputs rated or cord
: -48 V current end
DC/-60 varies on terminals.
V DC different To use
l Input product other
voltage models: types of
terminals,

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Power Technica Power Maximu Number Circuit Output


Module l Cable m Power of Inputs Breaker Terminal
Specifica Cross- Supply Rated Type on
tions Sectional Distance Current Power
Area Distribut
ion
Device

range: 16 mm2 29 m l S9303: purchase


-38.4 ≥ 20 A the
V DC l S9306 terminals
to -72 &S931 and
V DC 2: ≥ 40 prepare
l Maxim A cables
um onsite.
input
current
: 40 A
l Maxim
um
output
current
: 40 A

2200 W l Rated 10 mm2 14 m Equal to ≥ 63 A JG


DC power input the terminals
module voltage 16 mm2 23 m number of or cord
: -48 V power end
DC/-60 25 mm2 36 m modules terminals.
V DC To use
l Input other
voltage types of
range: terminals,
-40 V purchase
DC to the
-72 V terminals
DC and
prepare
l Maxim
cables
um
onsite.
input
current
: 60 A
l Maxim
um
output
current
: 42 A

2400 W l Rated 10 mm2 14 m Two -48 ≥ 60 A OT


DC power input V/-60 V terminals
module voltage inputs or cord
end

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Power Technica Power Maximu Number Circuit Output


Module l Cable m Power of Inputs Breaker Terminal
Specifica Cross- Supply Rated Type on
tions Sectional Distance Current Power
Area Distribut
ion
Device

: -48 V 16 mm2 23 m terminals.


DC/-60 To use
V DC other
l Input types of
voltage terminals,
range: purchase
-38.4 the
V DC terminals
to -72 and
V DC prepare
cables
l Maxim
onsite.
um
input
current
: 60 A
l Maxim
um
output
current
: 60 A

NOTE

l Select appropriate power cables according to the power supply distances. If the required power
supply distance exceeds the maximum power supply distance, use power distribution boxes. The
power supply distance is the cable length between the power distribution frame and power modules.
l To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect
the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration
provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.

Power Supply Configuration with Power Distribution Boxes

Table 3-6 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and
configurations of the DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-6 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches
Device Maximum Power Power System PoE Power
Model Power Distributio Module Power Module
Consumpti n Box Module Configurat
on of Configurat ion
Chassis ion (Applicabl
e Only to
V200R006C
00 and
Later
Versions)

S9303 1000 W 1600 W DC 1600 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable


power power (recommen in PoE
distribution module ded) power slots
box

2200 W DC 2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1 1+0


power power (recommen
distribution module ded)
box

2200 W DC 2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable


power power (recommen in PoE
distribution module ded) power slots
box

S9306 2200 W 1600 W DC 1600 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable


power power (recommen in PoE
distribution module ded) power slots
box

2200 W DC 2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1 1+0, 1+1,


power power (recommen 2+0, 2+1,
distribution module ded), 2+0, 2+2, 3+0,
box 2+1, 2+2 3+1, 4+0

2200 W DC 2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable


power power (recommen in PoE
distribution module ded) power slots
box

S9312 4200 W 1600 W DC 1600 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable


power power (recommen in PoE
distribution module ded) power slots
box

2200 W DC 2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1, 1+0, 1+1,


power power 2+0, 2+1 2+0, 2+1,
distribution module (recommend 2+2, 3+0,
box ed), 2+2 3+1, 4+0

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Device Maximum Power Power System PoE Power


Model Power Distributio Module Power Module
Consumpti n Box Module Configurat
on of Configurat ion
Chassis ion (Applicabl
e Only to
V200R006C
00 and
Later
Versions)

2200 W DC 2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1 Inapplicable


power power (recommen in PoE
distribution module ded) power slots
box

Table 3-7 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and
configurations of the DC power modules.

Table 3-7 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches
Device Model Maximum Power Power Power
Power Distribution Module Module
Consumption Box Configuration
of Chassis

S9303E 1100 W 2200 W DC 2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1


power power module (recommended
distribution box )

2200 W DC 2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1


power power module (recommended
distribution box )

S9306E 2400 W 2200 W DC 2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


power power module 2+1
distribution box (recommended)
, 2+2

2200 W DC 2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1


power power module (recommended
distribution box )

S9312E 4500 W 2200 W DC 2200 W DC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


power power module 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
distribution box 3+1
(recommended)
, 3+3, 4+0, 4+1

2200 W DC 2400 W DC 1+0, 1+1


power power module (recommended
distribution box )

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch.

NOTE

l If more than one power module is installed in a switch, you can connect the power modules to the
same power source or different power sources. It is recommended that you connect the power
modules to different power sources to improve power reliability.
l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or
the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to
your needs.
l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as
PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC
power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.
l As shown in Figure 3-7:
– When a 1600 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the
S9300 work in 1+1 redundancy mode.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the
S9300 works in 1+0 mode.

Figure 3-7 1600 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power
modules (different power sources)
Cabinet
1600 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box Switch
Circuit Circuit
breaker A1 breaker A2
DC power module 1
Line a

Circuit Circuit
breaker B1 breaker B2
DC power module 2
Line b

Circuit Circuit
breaker C1 breaker C2
2200 W DC
PoE power module
Line c
2200 W DC power
distribution box

As shown in Figure 3-8:


– When a 1600 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the
S9300 work in 1+1 redundancy mode. If a single power input can provide the
maximum power required by the switch connected to the power distribution box,
the two power modules can connect to the same power source.
– 1+0 configuration of 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 in
V200R006C00 and later versions

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-8 1600 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power
modules (same power source)
Cabinet
1600 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box Switch
Circuit Circuit
breaker A1 breaker A2
DC power module 1
Line a

Circuit Circuit
breaker B1 breaker B2

DC power module 2
Line b

Circuit Circuit
breaker C1 breaker C2
2200 W DC
PoE power module
Line c
2200 W DC power
distribution box

Short-circuiting bar

l As shown in Figure 3-9:


– When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the
S9300&S9300E work in 1+1 redundancy mode.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the
S9300 works in 1+0 mode.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-9 2200 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power
modules (different power sources)
Cabinet

2200 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

Circuit Circuit
breaker A breaker A1
DC power module 1
Line a

Circuit Circuit
breaker B breaker B1
DC power module 2
Line b

Circuit Circuit
breaker C breaker C1
2200 W DC
PoE power module
Line c
2200 W DC power
distribution box 2

l As shown in Figure 3-10:


– When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the
S9300&S9300E work in 1+1 redundancy mode. If the equipment room does not
have many power sources but has 126 A circuit breakers, the two power modules
can be connected to the same power source. The power input line can be split into
two in the power distribution box using a short-circuiting bar.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the
S9300 works in 1+0 mode.
NOTE

l To use a single power input for the two power modules, ensure that the rated current of the
circuit breaker connected to the power modules is larger than 126 A and the circuit breaker
must be connected to a 35 mm2 power cable.
l Redundant input and output terminals on the power distribution box can be left for future use.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-10 2200 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power
modules (same power source)
Cabinet

2200 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box Switch
Circuit Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

Circuit DC power module 1


Line a
breaker A2

Circuit Circuit DC power module 2


breaker B breaker B1
2200 W DC
PoE power module
Line b

Short-circuiting bar

l As shown in Figure 3-11:


– When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, four system power modules of the
S9300&S9300E work in 2+2 redundancy mode.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, four 2200 W DC PoE power modules on the
S9300 work in 2+2 redundancy mode.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-11 2200 W DC power distribution box and 2+2 redundancy of DC power
modules (different power sources)
Cabinet

2200 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box Switch

Circuit Circuit
breaker A breaker A1
Line a
DC power module 1
Circuit Circuit
breaker B breaker B1
Line b
Circuit Circuit DC power module 2
breaker C breaker C1
Line c
Circuit 2200 W DC PoE
Circuit
power module 1
breaker D breaker D1
Line d

Circuit 2200 W DC PoE


breaker E Circuit power module 2
breaker E1
Line e
Circuit DC power module 3
breaker F Circuit
breaker F1
Line f
Circuit DC power module 4
breaker G Circuit
breaker G1
Line g 2200 W DC PoE
Circuit power module 3
breaker H Circuit
breaker H1
Line h 2200 W DC PoE
power module 4

l As shown in Figure 3-12:


– When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, four system power modules of the
S9300&S9300E work in 2+2 redundancy mode. If the equipment room does not
have many power sources but has 126 A circuit breakers, the power modules can be
connected to the same power source. The power input line can be split into two in
the power distribution box using a short-circuiting bar.
– In V200R006C00 and later versions, four 2200 W DC PoE power modules on the
S9300 work in 2+2 redundancy mode.
NOTE

l To use a single power input for the two power modules, ensure that the rated current of the
circuit breaker connected to the power modules is larger than 126 A and the circuit breaker
must be connected to a 35 mm2 power cable.
l Redundant input and output terminals on the power distribution box can be left for future use.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-12 2200 W DC power distribution box and 2+2 redundancy of DC power
modules (same power source)
Cabinet

2200 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box Switch
Circuit Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

Circuit DC power module 1


Line a
breaker A2

Circuit DC power module 2


Circuit
breaker B breaker B1
2200 W DC PoE
Line b Circuit power module 1
breaker B2
2200 W DC PoE
Circuit Circuit power module 2
breaker C breaker C1
DC power module 3
Line c Circuit
breaker C2
Circuit DC power module 4
Circuit
breaker D breaker D1
2200 W DC PoE
Line d Circuit power module 3
breaker D2
2200 W DC PoE
power module 4

Short-circuiting bar

l (Only for S9312E) Figure 3-13 shows the power distribution system with a 2200 W DC
power distribution box and 3+3 redundancy of DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-13 2200 W DC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of DC power
modules
Cabinet
2200 W DC power
DC PDF distribution box Switch

Circuit Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

Circuit DC power module 1


Circuit Line a
breaker B breaker B1

Circuit Circuit DC power module 2


Line b
breaker C breaker C1

Line c DC power module 3

Circuit
Circuit
breaker D
breaker D1
DC power module 4
Circuit Circuit
Line d
breaker E breaker E1

Circuit Circuit DC power module 5


Line e
breaker F breaker F1

Line f DC power module 6

Generally, the internal power cables between power distribution boxes and cabinets are
installed beforehand. The external power cables between power distribution boxes and power
distribution frames need to be installed onsite. Table 3-8 describes requirements for external
power cables.

Table 3-8 Requirements for external power cables

Power Technical Power Maximum Number Output


Module Specificati Cable Power Supply of Termina
ons Cross- Distance Inputs l Type
Sectional (Circuit Breaker on
Area Rated Current) Power
Distribu
tion
Device

2200 W DC l Rated 16 mm2 18 m (≥ 63 A) Equal to OT


power input the terminals
module voltage: 25 mm2 29 m (≥ 63 A) number or cord
-48 V of power end
DC/-60 modules terminals.
V DC To use
other

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Power Technical Power Maximum Number Output


Module Specificati Cable Power Supply of Termina
ons Cross- Distance Inputs l Type
Sectional (Circuit Breaker on
Area Rated Current) Power
Distribu
tion
Device

l Input 35 mm2 l 41 m (≥ 63 A) types of


voltage l 20 m (≥ 126 A) terminals,
range: purchase
-40 V the
DC to terminals
-72 V and
DC prepare
l Maximu cables
m input onsite.
current:
60 A
l Maximu
m output
current:
42 A

1600 W DC l Rated 16 mm2 14 m (≥ 80 A) Two -48


power input V/-60 V
module voltage: 25 mm2 23 m (≥ 80 A) inputs
-48 V
DC/-60 35 mm2 32 m (≥ 80 A)
V DC
l Input
voltage
range:
-38.4 V
DC to
-72 V
DC
l Maximu
m input
current:
40 A
l Maximu
m output
current:
40 A

2400 W DC l Rated 16 mm2 18 m (≥ 63 A) Equal to


power input the
module voltage: 25 mm2 29 m (≥ 63 A) number
-48 V of power
modules

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Power Technical Power Maximum Number Output


Module Specificati Cable Power Supply of Termina
ons Cross- Distance Inputs l Type
Sectional (Circuit Breaker on
Area Rated Current) Power
Distribu
tion
Device

DC/-60 35 mm2 41 m (≥ 63 A)
V DC
l Input
voltage
range:
-38.4 V
DC to
-72 V
DC
l Maximu
m input
current:
60 A
l Maximu
m output
current:
60 A

NOTE
To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect the
two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration provides
redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.

Use of a 1600 W DC Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-14 shows how a 1600 W DC power distribution box is connected to power modules
in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs
from different power sources.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-14 Use of a 1600 W DC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power
modules in an S9306 chassis

DC PDF 1600 W DC power distribution box


-48V1
-48VA -48V1
SW1
NEG1(-)
SWa BGND
SW2 BGND
-48V2
-48VB
NEG2(-) SW3 -48V2
SWb BGND
SW4 BGND
RTNA
RTN1(+) -48V3
-48V3
RTNB BGND
RTN2(+)
BGND
-48V4

PGND -48V4
BGND
BGND

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Use of a 2200 W DC Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-15 shows how a 2200 W DC power distribution box is connected to power modules
in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs
from different power sources.

Figure 3-15 Use of a 2200 W DC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power
modules in an S9306 chassis

DC PDF 2200 W DC power distribution box

A1-
NEG1(-)
SWa SW1
A1+
RTN1(+)

B1+
RTN2(+)

B1-
NEG2(-)
SWb SW2

PGND

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

3.4.2 AC Power Supply

Power Supply Configuration Without Power Distribution Boxes

Table 3-9 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and
configurations of the AC power modules.

Table 3-9 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches
Device Model Maximum Power System Power PoE Power
Power Module Module Module
Consumption Configuration Configuration
of Chassis

S9303 1000 W 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1 1+0


(without PoE power module (recommended
power supply) )

2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1 1+0


power module (recommended
)

S9306 2200 W 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


(without PoE power module 2+1 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
power supply) (recommended) 3+1, 4+0
, 2+2

2200 W AC 1+0, 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


power module 1+1(recommen 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
ded), 2+0, 2+1, 3+1, 4+0
2+2

S9312 4200 W 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


(without PoE power module 2+1 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
power supply) (recommended) 3+1, 4+0
, 2+2

2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 1+0, 1+1, 2+0,


power module 2+1 2+1, 2+2, 3+0,
(recommended) 3+1, 4+0
, 2+2

Table 3-10 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and
configurations of the AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-10 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches
Device Model Maximum Power Power Module Power Module
Consumption of Configuration
Chassis

S9303E 1100 W 800 W AC power 1+0, 1+1


module (recommended)

2200 W AC power 1+0, 1+1


module (recommended),
2+0

S9306E 2400 W 800 W AC power 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1,


module 2+2, 3+0, 3+1
(recommended), 4+0

2200 W AC power 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1


module (recommended),
2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

S9312E 4500 W 800 W AC power 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1,


module 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 3+3,
4+0, 4+1, 5+0, 5+1
(recommended), 6+0

2200 W AC power 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1,


module 2+2, 3+0, 3+1
(recommended),
3+3, 4+0, 4+1, 5+0,
5+1, 6+0

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch.

NOTE

l If more than one power module is installed in a switch, you can connect the power modules to the
same power source or different power sources. It is recommended that you connect the power
modules to different power sources to improve power reliability.
l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or
the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to
your needs.
l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as
PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC
power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.
l Figure 3-16 shows the 1+1 redundancy of system power modules and 1+0 configuration
of PoE power module in a switch.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-16 1+1 redundancy of power modules


AC power strip Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a
breaker A

AC power module 2
Circuit Line b
breaker B

PoE AC power module


Circuit Line c
breaker C

l Figure 3-17 shows the 2+2 redundancy of system power modules and 2+2 configuration
of PoE power module in a switch.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-17 2+2 redundancy of power modules

AC power strip Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a
breaker A

AC power module 2
Circuit Line b
breaker B

AC power module 3
Circuit Line c
breaker C

AC power module 4
Circuit Line d
breaker D

PoE power module 1


Circuit Line e
breaker E

PoE power module 2


Circuit Line f
breaker F

PoE power module 3


Circuit Line g
breaker G

PoE power module 4


Circuit Line h
breaker H

l (Only for S9312E) Figure 3-18 shows the 3+3 redundancy of power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-18 3+3 redundancy of power modules

AC power strip Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a
breaker A

AC power module 2
Circuit Line b
breaker B

AC power module 3
Circuit Line c
breaker C

AC power module 4
Circuit Line d
breaker D

AC power module 5
Circuit Line e
breaker E

AC power module 6
Circuit Line f
breaker F

Table 3-11 describes the requirements for AC power distribution.

Table 3-11 Requirements for AC power distribution

Power Power Maximum Number of Circuit Output


Module Cable Power Inputs Breaker Terminal
Connector Supply Rated Type on
Type Distance Current Power
Distributio
n Device

800 W AC C13 straight 3m Equal to the ≥5A AC socket


power female number of complying
module power with the
modules local
standard. To
use OT
terminals or
cord end
terminals,
make power
cables
onsite.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Power Power Maximum Number of Circuit Output


Module Cable Power Inputs Breaker Terminal
Connector Supply Rated Type on
Type Distance Current Power
Distributio
n Device

2200 W AC C19 straight 3m Equal to the ≥ 15.5 A AC socket


power female number of complying
module power with the
modules local
standard. To
use OT
terminals or
cord end
terminals,
make power
cables
onsite.

NOTE

l For 800 W power modules, select the power cables with the maximum current of larger than or
equal to 10 A. For 2200 W power modules, select the power cables with the maximum current of
larger than or equal to 16 A.
l Each AC power module must be connected to an independent circuit breaker.
NOTE

l Select appropriate power cables according to the power supply distances. If the required power
supply distance exceeds the maximum power supply distance, use power distribution boxes. The
power supply distance is the cable length between the power distribution frame and power module.
l To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect
the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration
provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.
l An 800 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 800 W when the input voltage is
220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 400 W.
l A 2200 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 2200 W when the input voltage
is 220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 1100 W.
l An 800 W power module may not provide sufficient power for a chassis if the input voltage is 110
V. In this case, use a 2200 W AC power module as the system power module.

Power Supply Configuration with Power Distribution Boxes

Table 3-12 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and
configurations of the AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-12 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches
Device Maxim Power Power System PoE Power
Model um Distribution Module Power Module
Power Box Module Configurati
Consu Configurati on
mption on
of
Chassis

S9303 1000 W 800 W AC 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1 1+0


(without power power (recommend
PoE distribution module ed)
power box
supply)
2200 W AC 2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1 1+0
power power (recommend
distribution module ed)
box

S9306 2200 W 800 W AC 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 1+0, 1+1,


(without power power 2+0, 2+1 2+0, 2+1,
PoE distribution module (recommende 2+2, 3+0,
power box d), 2+2 3+1, 4+0
supply)
2200 W AC 2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1 1+0, 1+1,
power power (recommend 2+0, 2+1,
distribution module ed), 2+0, 2+2, 3+0,
box 2+1, 2+2 3+1, 4+0

S9312 4200 W 800 W AC 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 1+0, 1+1,


(without power power 2+0, 2+1 2+0, 2+1,
PoE distribution module (recommende 2+2, 3+0,
power box d), 2+2 3+1, 4+0
supply)
2200 W AC 2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 1+0, 1+1,
power power 2+0, 2+1 2+0, 2+1,
distribution module (recommende 2+2, 3+0,
box d), 2+2 3+1, 4+0

Table 3-13 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and
configurations of the AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-13 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches
Device Maxim Power Power Power Module
Model um Distribution Module Configuration
Power Box
Consu
mption
of
Chassis

S9303E 1100 W 800 W AC 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1 (recommended)


power power
distribution module
box

2200 W AC 2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1 (recommended),


power power 2+0
distribution module
box

S9306E 2400 W 800 W AC 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2,


power power 3+0, 3+1 (recommended),
distribution module 4+0
box

2200 W AC 2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1


power power (recommended), 2+2, 3+0,
distribution module 3+1, 4+0
box

S9312E 4500 W 800 W AC 800 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2,


power power 3+0, 3+1, 3+3, 4+0, 4+1,
distribution module 5+0, 5+1 (recommended),
box 6+0

2200 W AC 2200 W AC 1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2,


power power 3+0, 3+1 (recommended),
distribution module 3+3, 4+0, 4+1, 5+0, 5+1, 6+0
box

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch.

NOTE

l If more than one power module is installed in a switch, you can connect the power modules to the
same power source or different power sources. It is recommended that you connect the power
modules to different power sources to improve power reliability.
l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or
the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to
your needs.
l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as
PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC
power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

l Figure 3-19 shows the power distribution system with 800 W AC power distribution
boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources,
and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Figure 3-19 800 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power
modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (different power sources)
Cabinet

800 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

800W AC power
distribution box 2

AC power module 2
Circuit Line b Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

2200 W AC power
distribution box

Circuit PoE power module


Circuit Line c
breaker C breaker C1

l Figure 3-20 shows the power distribution system with an 800 W AC power distribution
box, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to the same power source, and
1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-20 800 W AC power distribution box, 1+1 redundancy of system power
modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (same power source)
Cabinet
800 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

Circuit AC power module 2


breaker A2

2200 W AC power
distribution box

Circuit PoE power module


Circuit Line b
breaker B breaker B1

l Figure 3-21 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution
boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources,
and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-21 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power
modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (different power sources)
Cabinet

2200 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Line a Circuit
Circuit
breaker A1
breaker A

AC power module 2
Circuit Line b Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

2200 W AC power
distribution box 2

PoE power module


Circuit Line c Circuit
breaker C breaker C1

l Figure 3-22 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution
boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to the same power source,
and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-22 2200 W AC power distribution box, 1+1 redundancy of system power
modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (same power source)
Cabinet

2200 W AC power
AC PDF
distribution box1

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

Circuit AC power module 2


Switch
breaker A2

2200 W AC power
distribution box2

PoE power module


Circuit Line b Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

Short-circuiting bar
l Figure 3-23 shows the power distribution system with 800 W AC power distribution
boxes, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources,
and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-23 800 W AC power distribution boxes, 2+2 redundancy configuration of


system power modules, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules (different power
sources)
Cabinet
800 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Circuit
Line a breaker A1
breaker A

Circuit AC power module 2


breaker A2

800 W AC power
distribution box 2
Line b
AC power module 3
Circuit Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

Circuit AC power module 4


breaker B2

2200 W AC power
distribution box

PoE power
Line c Circuit
Circuit module 1
breaker C1
breaker C
PoE power
Circuit
module 2
breaker C2

PoE power
Circuit
Circuit Line d module 3
breaker D1
breaker D
PoE power
Circuit
module 4
breaker D2

Short-circuiting bar

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Cabinet
800 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Circuit
Line a breaker A1
breaker A

Circuit AC power module 2


breaker A2

800 W AC power
distribution box 2
Line b
AC power module 3
Circuit Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

Circuit AC power module 4


breaker B2

l Figure 3-24 shows the power distribution system with an 800 W AC power distribution
box, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules connected to the same power source, and
2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-24 800 W AC power distribution box, 2+2 redundancy of system power
modules, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules (same power source)
Cabinet

800 W AC power
distribution box Switch
AC PDF

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1
AC power module 2
Circuit
breaker A2
AC power module 3
Circuit
breaker A3

AC power module 4
Circuit
breaker A4

2200 W AC power
distribution box

PoE power
Circuit Line b Circuit module 1
breaker B breaker B1
PoE power
Circuit module 2
breaker B2
PoE power
Circuit Line c Circuit module 3
breaker C breaker C1
PoE power
Circuit module 4
breaker C2

Short-circuiting bar

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Cabinet

800 W AC power
distribution box Switch
AC PDF

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1
AC power module 2
Circuit
breaker A2
AC power module 3
Circuit
breaker A3

AC power module 4
Circuit
breaker A4

l Figure 3-25 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution
boxes, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources,
and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-25 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 2+2 redundancy of system power
modules, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules (different power sources)
Cabinet
2200 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

AC power module 2
Circuit
breaker A2
AC power module 3
Circuit Line b Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

AC power module 4
Circuit
breaker B2

2200 W AC power
distribution box 2

PoE power
Circuit Line c Circuit module 1
breaker C breaker C1
PoE power
Circuit module 2
breaker C2
PoE power
Circuit Line d Circuit module 3
breaker D breaker D1
PoE power
Circuit module 4
breaker D2

Short-circuiting bar

l Figure 3-26 shows the power distribution system with 800 W AC power distribution
boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-26 800 W AC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power
modules
Cabinet
800 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

AC power module 2
Circuit
breaker A2
AC power module 3
Circuit
breaker A3

800 W AC power
distribution box 2

AC power
Circuit Line b Circuit module 4
breaker B breaker B1

AC power
Circuit module 5
breaker B2
AC power
Circuit module 6
breaker B3

Short-circuiting bar

l (Only for S9312E)


Figure 3-27 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution
boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-27 2200 W AC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power
modules
Cabinet
2200 W AC power
AC PDF distribution box 1 Switch

AC power module 1
Circuit Line a Circuit
breaker A breaker A1

AC power module 2
Circuit
breaker A2

AC power module 3
Circuit Line b Circuit
breaker B breaker B1

2200 W AC power
distribution box 2

AC power module 4
Circuit Line c Circuit
breaker C breaker C1

AC power module 5
Circuit
breaker C2

AC power module 6
Circuit Line d Circuit
breaker D breaker D1

Short-circuiting bar

Generally, the internal power cables between power distribution boxes and cabinets are
installed beforehand. The external power cables between power distribution boxes and power
distribution frames need to be installed onsite. Table 3-14 describes requirements for external
power cables.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-14 Requirements for external power cables


Power Power Maximum Circuit Breaker Numbe Output
Module Cable Power Supply Rated Current r of Termin
Cross- Distance Inputs al Type
Sectional on
Area Power
Distrib
ution
Device

800 W AC 16 mm2 25 m Determined by Determi OT


power the power of the ned by terminals
module device connected the or cord
to the power power end
distribution box capacity terminals
of each . To use
line in other
the types of
equipme terminals
nt room ,
and purchase
number the
of power terminals
modules and
used in prepare
the cables
switch. onsite.
Each 800
W AC
power
distributi
on box
requires
one
power
input and
provides
eight
power
outputs.

2200 W AC 6 mm2 26 m ≥16 A or 32 A Determi OT


power ned by terminals
module the or cord
power end
capacity terminals
of each . To use
line in other
the types of
equipme terminals
nt room ,
and purchase

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Power Power Maximum Circuit Breaker Numbe Output


Module Cable Power Supply Rated Current r of Termin
Cross- Distance Inputs al Type
Sectional on
Area Power
Distrib
ution
Device

16 mm2 71 m number the


of power terminals
modules and
used in prepare
the cables
switch. onsite.
Each
2200 W
AC
power
distributi
on box
requires
four
power
input
lines
when it
is fully
loaded.

NOTICE
Each AC power module must be connected to an independent circuit breaker.

NOTE

l An 800 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 800 W when the input voltage is
220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 400 W.
l To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect
the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration
provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.
l A 2200 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 2200 W when the input voltage
is 220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 1100 W.
l An 800 W power module may not provide sufficient power for a chassis if the input voltage is 110
V. In this case, use a 2200 W AC power module as the system power module.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Use of an 800 W AC Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-28 shows how an 800 W AC power distribution box is connected to system power
modules in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require
inputs from different power sources.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-28 Use of an 800 W AC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power
modules in an S9306 chassis
800 W AC power
distribution box
Switches Output area
OO O O OO OO
UU U U UU UU
Input T T T T T T T T
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 PP P P P P P P
area U U U U UU UU
T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2200W AC power
distribution box
Area A Area B
Switches Switches

SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

Input O O O O Input
U U U U
area T T T T area
P P P P
U U U U
T T T T
1 2 1 2

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Use of a 2200 W AC Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-29 how a 2200 W AC power distribution box is connected to power modules in an
S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs from
different power sources.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-29 Use of a 2200 W AC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power
modules in an S9306 chassis
2200 W AC power
distribution box 1
Area A Area B
Switches Switches

SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

Input O O O O Input
U U U U
area T T T T area
P P P P
U U U U
T T T T
1 2 1 2

2200 W AC power
distribution box 2
Area A Area B
Switches Switches

SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

Input O O O O Input
U U U U
area T T T T area
P P P P
U U U U
T T T T
1 2 1 2

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories


Table 3-15 shows the tools required for installing a switch.

Table 3-15 Installation tools


Tool Description Picture

Protectiv Used to prevent


e gloves electrostatic
discharges.

ESD Used to protect


gloves hands during
operation.

ESD Used to prevent


wrist electrostatic
strap discharges. Wear
the strap on your
wrist and insert
the other end into
the ESD jack on
the cabinet.

Utility Used to cut


knife cartons or paper.

Scissors Used to cut the


installation
template.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Tool Description Picture

Tweezers Used to remove


optical fibers or
network cables.

Measurin Used to measure


g tape distances.

Marker Used to mark


component
installation
positions.

Flat-head Used to tighten


screwdri or loosen screws
ver and bolts with a
slotted head.

Phillips Used to tighten


screwdri or loosen screws
ver and bolts with a
cross head.

Diagonal Used to cut


pliers insulation tubes
and cable ties.

Adjustab Used to tighten


le or loosen hex or
wrench square bolts and
nuts. The span
can be adjusted
to suit bolts or
nuts in different
sizes.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Tool Description Picture

Needle- Used raise


nose locking bars on a
pliers crate.

Network Used to test


cable network cable
tester connectivity.

Multimet Used to test


er cabinet
insulation, cable
connectivity, and
device electrical
performance
indicators,
including
voltage, current,
and resistance.

Table 3-16 shows the installation accessories required for installing a switch.

Table 3-16 Installation accessories


Tool Description Picture

Insulatio Used to insulate


n tape power wires or
other conductors.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Tool Description Picture

Corrugat Used to protect


ed pipe optical fibers.

Table 3-17 lists the installation accessories delivered with a switch.

Table 3-17 Installation accessories


Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Cable tie 50 Used to 21100015


(150 x 3.6 bundle
mm) cables.

Cable tie 50 Used to 21100144


(300 x 3.6 bundle
mm) cables.

Tweezers 1 pair Used to 63120166


install or
remove
optical fibers
on optical
ports.

Signal 5 Used to 29041060


cable label identify
locations of
signal cables.

Power 1 Used to 29041061


cable label identify the
location of
the power
cable.

ESD wrist 1 Prevents 28050001


strap ESD
damages
when you
touch or
operate the
equipment or
components.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Fiber 1m Used to 21101258


binding bundle
tape optical
fibers.

Serial cable 1 Used to 04051113


connect the
console port
of the switch
to a serial
port of a
maintenance
terminal for
local
commissioni
ng or
maintenance
of the switch.

Power 1 Receives 04046941


cable power from
an external
power supply
system to
power the
switch.

Ground 1 Used to 04150842


cable ground the
switch.

Removable 2 Used to 21240209


handle NOTE move the
The S9303 switch.
and
S9303E
switches
do not
have
removable
handles.

Panel l S9303& Used to fix 26020141


screw S9303E the switch.
(M6X12) :8
l S9306&
S9306E
: 12
l S9312&
S9312E
: 15

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Preparing for Installation

Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Floating l S9303& Installed on 26020075


nut (M6) S9303E mounting
:8 rails of a
l S9306& cabinet/rack
S9306E and used
: 12 with M6
screws to
l S9312& secure the
S9312E switch in the
: 15 cabinet/rack.

Quick 1 Used to 31507393


Installation guide
Guide equipment
installation.

Warranty 1 Warranty of 31110018


card repair
service.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Unpacking a Switch

4 Unpacking a Switch

About This Chapter

4.1 Unpacking a Crate


4.2 Unpacking a Carton
4.3 Unpacking a Card

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Unpacking a Switch

4.1 Unpacking a Crate

Context
Crates are used to package goods such as cabinets and S9312&S9312E switches. A crate is
secured with steel locking bars and has foam materials in it to protect the product. When
equipment is delivered, unpack the crate and check the equipment and accessories in the crate.

NOTICE
l Do not turn a crate upside down; otherwise, the equipment in the crate will be damaged.
l Wear gloves or take other protective measures to prevent hand injuries when unpacking a
crate.

NOTE

Before unpacking a crate, move it to or close to the installation site (equipment room for example). Do
not transport the unpacked equipment over a long distance.

Tools
l Flat-head screwdriver
l Needle-nose pliers
l Protective gloves

Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the crate. If the crate is delivered upside down, the crate is wet, or the label on the
crate is damaged, analyze the cause and contact the equipment supplier immediately. If no
exceptions are found, start unpacking the crate.

Step 2 Raise all the locking bars on the cover of the crate. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (or a claw
hammer or a pair of needle-nose pliers) into the hole on a locking bar and raise the flat-head
screwdriver to raise the locking bar.
Locking bar

Step 3 Open the crate cover and remove it.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Unpacking a Switch

Step 4 Raise the locking bars on the side panels of the crate and remove the side panels.

Step 5 Remove the foam materials, move the equipment out of the crate, and inspect the equipment.
If rust or other damage is found on the equipment, analyze the cause and contact the
equipment supplier immediately.

----End

4.2 Unpacking a Carton

Context
Cartons are used to package S9303&S9306 and S9303E&S9306E switches, and cables, cards,
power modules, or other modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Unpacking a Switch

NOTICE
l When cutting the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape on a carton, do not insert the utility
knife too deep; otherwise, the utility knife may cut the components in the carton.
l Wear gloves or take other protection measures to prevent hand injuries when unpacking a
carton.

NOTE

Before unpacking a carton, move it to or close to the installation site (equipment room for example). Do
not transport the unpacked equipment over a long distance.

Tools
l Utility knife
l Diagonal pliers
l Protective gloves
l Adjustable wrench
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the carton. If the carton is wet, or the label on the carton is damaged, analyze the
cause and contact the equipment supplier immediately. If no exception is found, go to the next
step.
Step 2 Check the label on the carton to learn about the type and number of components in the carton.
Step 3 Open the carton.
1. Cut the strapping band with diagonal pliers. See callout 1 in Figure 4-1.
2. Cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape with a utility knife. See callout 2 in Figure 4-1.
3. Open the carton and remove the foam materials. See callout 3 in Figure 4-1.
4. Take out the device or component from the carton. If a switch is in the carton, lift the
switch out of the carton by its handles.

Figure 4-1 Unpacking other cartons


Pressure-sensitive
Strapping band adhesive tape Foam material

(1) (2) (3)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Unpacking a Switch

Step 4 Check whether the number of components on the packing list is the same as the number
marked on the carton. If so, take out the components.
Step 5 Check the components. If any problem is found, contact the equipment supplier immediately.

----End

4.3 Unpacking a Card

Context
A card is packed in an ESD bag, which is placed in a carton with foam materials.

NOTICE
l Electronic devices are vulnerable to electrostatic discharges (ESD). Before touching a
card, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap (with the other end in an ESD jack). Do not
touch electronic components on the card.
l If a card is moved from a cold, dry place to a warm, humid place, wait more than 30
minutes before unpacking the card. Otherwise, moisture accumulated on the card surfaces
will damage the card.

NOTE

The desiccant in an ESD bag can keep items in the ESD bag dry.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Utility knife

Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the carton of the card. If any damage is found on the carton, or the label on the carton
is damaged, contact the equipment supplier immediately. If the package is intact, go to the
next step.
Step 2 Wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap (with the other end inserted in an ESD jack).

Step 3 Open the carton.


1. Cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape with a utility knife. See callout 1 in Figure 4-2.
2. Open the carton and remove the foam materials. See callout 2 in Figure 4-2.
3. Open the ESD bag and take out the card. See callout 3 in Figure 4-2.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Unpacking a Switch

Figure 4-2 Unpacking a card


Pressure-sensitive
adhesive tape Foam material

(1) (2) (3)

Step 4 Check the card. If any damage is found on the card, analyze the cause and contact the
equipment supplier immediately.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

5 Installing Switches

About This Chapter

5.1 Installing S9303&S9303E Chassis


5.2 Installing S9306&S9306E Chassis
5.3 Installing S9312&S9312E Chassis

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

5.1 Installing S9303&S9303E Chassis

Context

NOTICE
l Do not block the air intake vent (on the left side) and air exhaust vent (at the rear) on the
chassis. Leave 70 mm to 90 mm clearance to ensure effective heat dissipation.
l Do not move or lift a switch by the top edges of the chassis as this may distort the chassis.
l When installing a switch, ensure that the chassis bottom is completely attached to the
guide rails or tray in the cabinet or rack.

NOTE

l Place the tweezers delivered with the chassis in the cabinet or rack. You may need to use the
tweezers to remove optical fibers or network cables during equipment maintenance.
l The methods for installing the S9303 and S9303E chassis are the same. This section uses S9303E as
an example to describe the installation procedure.

Tools and Accessories


l Scissors
l Flat-head screwdriver
l Phillips screwdriver
l Marker
l Installation template
l Floating nuts and matching screws
l Guide rails and matching screws (separately purchased)

Procedure
Step 1 Install mounting brackets. Measure the distance a from the front mounting rails to the interior
side of the front door (see 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack), and then install mounting
brackets to the switch based on the mapping between distance a and mounting bracket
installation positions.

Table 5-1 Mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions
Distance a Mounting Bracket Installation Position

68 mm See Figure 5-1.

l 95 mm See Figure 5-2.


l 100 mm

193 mm See Figure 5-3.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-1 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 68 mm)

8-M3

≤25kg(55Ib)

Figure 5-2 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 95 mm or a = 100 mm)

8-M3

≤25kg(55Ib)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-3 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 193 mm)

8-M3

≤25kg(55Ib)

Step 2 Mark mounting holes on the mounting rails.


1. Use a pair of scissors to cut off the installation template along the cutting line for the
S9303&S9303E chassis. See Figure 5-4

Figure 5-4 Cutting off the installation template


S9300&S9300E Series Switches
03 mounting hole 1
Quick Installation Guide 03 mounting hole 3
06 mounting hole 1 Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template. 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1 12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2 12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 03 mounting hole 4


06 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail 03 guide rail

06 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3 12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4 12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail 06 guide rail

12 mounting hole 5 12 mounting hole 11

12 mounting hole 6 12 mounting hole 12

12 guide rail 12 guide rail

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

2. Locate the four mounting holes to be used. Determine the chassis installation position in
the cabinet, use the installation template to locate four mounting holes, and use a marker
to mark these mounting holes. See Figure 5-5.
NOTE

– The installation height of a chassis must be a multiple of 1 U (including 1 U).


– 1 U equals 1.75 inch (44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 60297.

Figure 5-5 Locating mounting holes

Install floating nuts

S9300&S9300E Series Switches


03 mounting hole 1
06 mounting hole 1
Quick Installation Guide
Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template.
03 mounting hole 3
06 mounting hole 5
Narrow
12 mounting hole 1 12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2 12 mounting hole 8

Wide
03 mounting hole 2 03 mounting hole 4
1U
06 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 6

Wide

Guide rail Guide rail


bottom bottom
≥1U

3. Remove the installation template.


Step 3 Install the floating nuts and guide rails.
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to install four floating nuts in the marked mounting holes.
See callout 1 in Figure 5-6.
2. Secure the guide rails in the marked position with screws. See callout 2 in Figure 5-6.

NOTICE
If no guide rails are available, use a tray instead.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-6 Securing the guide rails

M5

Step 4 Install the chassis in the cabinet.


1. Two persons lift the chassis onto the guide rails from the front door, and then slowly
push the chassis into the cabinet along the guide rails. See callout 1 in Figure 5-7.
2. Use screws to secure the chassis to the cabinet. See callout 2 in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Installing the chassis in the cabinet

1
M6

≤25
kg(55
lb)
P
2
W
R
2
P
W
R
1

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Step 5 Connect the ground cable. The methods for connecting the OT and JG terminals are different.
Select a method according to the ground cable type.
l Figure 5-8 shows how to connect the OT terminal.
l Figure 5-9 shows how to connect the JG terminal.

Figure 5-8 Connecting the ground cable (OT terminal)

Hazardous
moving
and other parts, keeping
body parts fingers
away.
Ϲ⽕೼
亢᠛ᮟ
䕀ᯊ᥹
㾺৊⠛
ʽ

RUN/ALM

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-9 Connecting the ground cable (JG terminal)

Hazardous
moving
and other parts, keeping
body parts fingers
away.
Ϲ⽕೼
亢᠛ᮟ
䕀ᯊ᥹
㾺৊⠛
ʽ

RUN/ALM

----End

5.2 Installing S9306&S9306E Chassis

Prerequisites

NOTICE
l Do not block the air intake vent (on the left side) and air exhaust vent (at the rear) on the
chassis. Leave 70 mm to 90 mm clearance to ensure effective heat dissipation.
l Do not move or lift a switch by the top edges of the chassis as this may distort the chassis.
l When installing a switch, ensure that the chassis bottom is completely attached to the
guide rails or tray in the cabinet or rack.

NOTE

l Place the tweezers delivered with the chassis in the cabinet or rack. You may need to use the
tweezers to remove optical fibers or network cables during equipment maintenance.
l The methods for installing the S9306 and S9306E chassis are the same. This section uses S9306E as
an example to describe the installation procedure.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Tools and Accessories


l Scissors
l Flat-head screwdriver
l Phillips screwdriver
l Marker
l Installation template
l Floating nuts and matching screws
l Guide rails and matching screws (separately purchased)
l Removable handles

Procedure
Step 1 Install mounting brackets. Measure the distance a from the front mounting rails to the interior
side of the front door (see 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack), and then install mounting
brackets to the switch based on the mapping between distance a and mounting bracket
installation positions.

Table 5-2 Mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions
Distance a Mounting Bracket Installation Position

68 mm See Figure 5-10.

l 95 mm See Figure 5-11.


l 100 mm

193 mm See Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-10 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 68 mm)


14-M3

≤45kg(99Ib)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-11 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 95 mm or a = 100 mm)


14-M3

≤45kg(99Ib)

Figure 5-12 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 193 mm)


14-M3

≤45kg(99Ib)

Step 2 Mark mounting holes on the mounting rails.


1. Use a pair of scissors to cut off the installation template along the cutting line for the
S9306&S9306E chassis. See Figure 5-13.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-13 Cutting off the installation template


S9300&S9300E Series Switches
03 mounting hole 1
Quick Installation Guide 03 mounting hole 3
06 mounting hole 1 Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template. 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1 12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2 12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 03 mounting hole 4


06 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail 03 guide rail

06 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3 12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4 12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail 06 guide rail

12 mounting hole 5 12 mounting hole 11

12 mounting hole 6 12 mounting hole 12

12 guide rail 12 guide rail

2. Determine the chassis installation position in the cabinet, use the installation template to
locate eight mounting holes, and use a marker to mark these mounting holes. See Figure
5-14.
NOTE

– The installation height of a chassis must be a multiple of 1 U (including 1 U).


– 1 U equals 1.75 inch (44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 60297.

Figure 5-14 Locating mounting holes


Install floating nuts
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
03 mounting hole 1
Quick Installation Guide 03 mounting hole 3
06 mounting hole 1 Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template. 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1 12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2 12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 03 mounting hole 4


06 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail 03 guide rail

Narrow
Wide
06 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 7
1U
12 mounting hole 3 12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4 12 mounting hole 10


Wide

06 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail 06 guide rail

Guide rail Guide rail


bottom ≥1U bottom

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

3. Remove the installation template.

Step 3 Install the floating nuts and guide rails.


1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to install eight floating nuts in the marked mounting holes.
See callout 1 in Figure 5-15.
2. Secure the guide rails in the marked position with screws. See callout 2 in Figure 5-15.

NOTICE
If no guide rails are available, use a tray instead.

Figure 5-15 Securing the guide rails

M5

Step 4 Install the chassis in the cabinet.


1. Install the removable handles on two sides of the chassis. Two persons lift the chassis
using the handles several times to verify that the handles are installed correctly. See
callout 1 in Figure 5-16.
2. Two persons lift the chassis onto the guide rails from the front door and slowly push the
chassis into one third of the cabinet depth. Hold the chassis while removing the
removable handles. Then push the chassis completely in the cabinet. See callout 2 in
Figure 5-16.
3. Use screws to secure the chassis to the cabinet. See callout 3 in Figure 5-16.
4. Hang the handles on the handle slots at rear of the chassis. See callout 4 in Figure 5-16.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-16 Installing the chassis in the cabinet

2
1 M6

CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
PWR1

≤45
kg(99
lb)

2
1

Step 5 Connect the ground cable.

----End

5.3 Installing S9312&S9312E Chassis

Prerequisites

NOTICE
l Do not block the air intake vent (on the left side) and air exhaust vent (at the rear) on the
chassis. Leave 70 mm to 90 mm clearance to ensure effective heat dissipation.
l Do not move or lift a switch by the top edges of the chassis as this may distort the chassis.
l When installing a switch, ensure that the chassis bottom is completely attached to the
guide rails or tray in the cabinet or rack.

NOTE

l Place the tweezers delivered with the chassis in the cabinet or rack. You may need to use the
tweezers to remove optical fibers or network cables during equipment maintenance.
l The methods for installing the S9312 and S9312E chassis are the same. This section uses S9312E as
an example to describe the installation procedure.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Tools and Accessories


l Scissors
l Flat-head screwdriver
l Phillips screwdriver
l Marker
l Installation template
l Floating nuts and matching screws
l Guide rails and matching screws (separately purchased)
l Removable handles

Procedure
Step 1 Install mounting brackets. Measure the distance a from the front mounting rails to the interior
side of the front door (see 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack), and then install mounting
brackets to the switch based on the mapping between distance a and mounting bracket
installation positions.

Table 5-3 Mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions
Distance a Mounting Bracket Installation Position

68 mm See Figure 5-17.

l 95 mm See Figure 5-18.


l 100 mm

193 mm See Figure 5-19.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-17 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 68 mm)


18-M3

OR

≤75kg(165Ib)

Figure 5-18 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 95 mm or a = 100 mm)


18-M3

OR

≤75kg(165Ib)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-19 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 193 mm)


18-M3

OR

≤75kg(165Ib)

Step 2 Mark mounting holes on the mounting rails.


1. Determine the chassis installation position in the cabinet, use the installation template for
the S9312&S9312E to locate 12 mounting holes, and use a marker to mark these
mounting holes. See Figure 5-20.
NOTE

– The installation height of a chassis must be a multiple of 1 U (including 1 U).


– 1 U equals 1.75 inch (44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 60297.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-20 Locating mounting holes

Install floating nuts


S9300&S9300E Series Switches
03 mounting hole 1
Quick Installation Guide 03 mounting hole 3
06 mounting hole 1 Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template. 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1 12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2 12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 03 mounting hole 4


06 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail 03 guide rail

06 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3 12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4 12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail 06 guide rail


Narrow
Wide
1U
Wide
12 mounting hole 5 12 mounting hole 11

12 mounting hole 6 12 mounting hole 12

12 guide rail 12 guide rail

Guide rail Guide rail


≥1U
bottom bottom

2. Remove the installation template.


Step 3 Install the floating nuts and guide rails.
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to install 12 floating nuts in the marked mounting holes. See
callout 1 in Figure 5-21.
2. Secure the guide rails in the marked position with screws. See callout 2 in Figure 5-21.

NOTICE
If no guide rails are available, use a tray instead.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-21 Securing the guide rails

M5

Step 4 Install the chassis in the cabinet.


1. Install the removable handles on two sides of the chassis. Two persons lift the chassis
using the handles several times to verify that the handles are installed correctly. See
callout 1 in Figure 5-22.
2. Three persons lift the chassis onto the guide rails from the front door and slowly push the
chassis into one third of the cabinet depth. Hold the chassis while removing the
removable handles. Then push the chassis completely in the cabinet. See callout 2 in
Figure 5-22.
3. Use screws to secure the chassis to the cabinet. See callout 3 in Figure 5-22.
4. Hang the handles on the handle slots at rear of the chassis. See callout 4 in Figure 5-22.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-22 Installing the chassis in the cabinet


4

2
M6

1
3

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
PWR1

≤75
kg(165
lb)

2
1

Step 5 Connect the ground cable.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

6 Installing Modules

About This Chapter

6.1 Installing a Power Module


6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard
6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card
6.4 Installing a Card
6.5 Installing Cable Management Frames

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

6.1 Installing a Power Module

Context

NOTICE
l AC and DC power modules cannot be installed in the same type of power module slots on
a switch (system or PoE power module slots). Power modules with different power values
cannot be installed in the same type of power module slots either.
l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can
be used as PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power
modules, 800 W AC power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as
PoE power modules.
l Only the S9300 supports 1600 W DC power modules.
l Cover all the vacant slots with filler panels to ensure good electromagnetic shielding, heat
dissipation, and dustproof performance.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 2 (Optional) Remove the filler panel (if any) from the power module slot.

Step 3 Install the power module into the power module slot.
1. Raise the ejector lever. With one hand beneath the power module, use the other hand to
grasp the panel and slowly slide the power module into the slot, until the hook on the
ejector lever is attached to the interior side of the power module slot. See callout 1 in
Figure 6-1.
2. Lower the ejector lever to ensure that the power module is completely seated in the slot.
See callout 2 of Figure 6-1.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screw on the ejector lever. See callout 3
in Figure 6-1.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-1 Installing a power module

1
ON
RUN 3
ALM

FAULT

OFF

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
PWR1

≤75
kg(165
lb)

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ALM 1
FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

ON
RUN

ALM

FAULT

OFF

NOTE

This figure shows installation of an 800 W power module (on the S9312E) as an example.

Step 4 Install filler panels on all the vacant power module slots.

----End

6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced


Flexible Service Subcard

Context
If a Cluster Switching System Service (CSS) subcard or an enhanced flexible service subcard
is configured for a card, install the subcard on this card before you install the card in the
chassis. For the S9300, CSS subcards or enhanced flexible service subcards are installed in
subcard slots of MPUs.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

NOTICE
l The CSS subcard and enhanced flexible service subcard are not hot swappable.
l Handle a card slowly, gently and do not touch the electronic components on the card.

NOTE

The methods for installing a CSS subcard and an enhanced flexible service subcard are the same. A
S9300 CSS subcard is used as an example here.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l 50 cm x 50 cm ESD fabric

Procedure
Step 1 Lay the ESD fabric on a desk or another flat surface. Use the ESD bag of a card as a substitute
if no ESD fabric is available.
Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 3 Take out the motherboard (such as an MPU) from the ESD bag and place the motherboard on
the ESD fabric.
Step 4 Install a CSS subcard.
1. Take out the CSS subcard from the ESD bag. Hold the panel of the CSS subcard and
slowly insert the CSS subcard into the subcard slot in the MPU. See callout 1 in Figure
6-2.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the CSS subcard. See callout
2 in Figure 6-2.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-2 Installing a CSS subcard

CSS ID

MASTER
1 2 3 4

1
5 6 7 8

ALM
ACT RUN/

ETH
CON
CLK2
CLK1

LINK RUN/ALM

S0-1
1 2 3 4
VSTS
CSS ID

MASTER
1 2 3 4 4
3
2
1
5 6 7 8

----End

6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card

Context
This section describes how to install a clock daughter card CKM on a motherboard.

NOTICE
l You must install clock daughter cards on both the active and standby MPUs.
l Take ESD protective measures when installing a clock daughter card.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l 50 cm x 50 cm ESD fabric

Procedure
Step 1 Lay the ESD fabric on a desk or another flat surface. Use the ESD bag of a card as a substitute
if no ESD fabric is available.
Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Step 3 Take out the motherboard (MPU) from the ESD bag and place the motherboard on the ESD
fabric.
Step 4 Take out the clock daughter card from the ESD bag. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the
three screws on the clock daughter card, and then disassemble them into type-1 screws, long
studs, short studs, and type-2 screws.
Type-1 screw

Long stud

Short stud

Type-2 screw

Step 5 Install three studs on the motherboard.


l If the motherboard is a Main Control Unit (MCU), install the three short studs into holes
M9, M10, and M11. Fasten the studs.

M10

M9
M11

l If the motherboard is a Switch Routing Unit (SRU), install the three long studs into holes
M8, M10, and M11. Secure the long studs with type-1 screws from back of the SRU.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Fasten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

M8
M11
M10

Step 6 Gently insert the connectors of the clock daughter card into the slots on the motherboard, and
then use type-2 screws to secure the clock daughter card on the motherboard. Fasten the
screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

----End

6.4 Installing a Card

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Context

NOTICE
l Cover all the vacant slots with filler panels to ensure good electromagnetic shielding, heat
dissipation, and dustproof performance.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves when you install cards. Do not touch a
card with bare hands.
l When installing a card, push the card slowly and horizontally into a slot along guide rails
in the slot to protect components on the cards from collisions. Ensure that the card is
securely installed in the slot.

NOTE

The following installation procedure applies to MPUs, LPUs.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 2 Remove the filler panel from the slot and save the filler panel for later use. See Figure 6-3.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-3 Removing a filler panel

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
PWR1

≤75
kg(165
lb)

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT
OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

Step 3 Take out the card from the ESD bag and rotate the ejector levers outward. With one hand
beneath the card, use the other hand to grasp the panel of the card and slowly slide the card
along the guide rails, until the hooks of the ejector levers are attached to the interior sides of
the slot. See callout 1 in Figure 6-4.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-4 Installing a card

2
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
PWR1

≤75
kg(165
lb)

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT
OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

Step 4 Rotate the ejector levers inward until the card is completed seated in the slot. See callout 2 in
Figure 6-4. You will hear a click from the ejector levers when the card is completely seated in
the slot.
NOTE

A Centralized Monitoring Unit (CMU) has no ejector levers, and you can insert it directly into a CMU
slot.

Step 5 (Only for a CMU) Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the panel. See
Figure 6-5.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-5 Installing a CMU

RUN/ALM
1

ACT
RS485
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

MON
CMUA

2
PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
PWR1
RUN/ALM

≤75
kg(165
lb)
ACT
RS485
MON

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ALM
ON 2
RUN
ALM 1
ON
RUN FAULT CMUA
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

Step 6 Install filler panels on all the vacant slots.

----End

6.5 Installing Cable Management Frames

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l Cable management frames and matching screws

Procedure
Step 1 Take out the cable management frames and screws from the package.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Installing Modules

Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 3 Align positioning pins on a cable management frame with positioning holes on the chassis,
hang the cable management frame in the positioning holes, and drag it downward to secure it
on the chassis. See callout 1 in Figure 6-6.
Step 4 Install all cable management frames in the same way, and then use a Phillips screwdriver to
tighten all the screws. See callout 2 in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Installing cable management frames

1
Positioning hole

Positioning pin

CLK1
CLK2
CON
ETH

RST
ACT RUN/ALM
M4
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

7 Connecting Switches

About This Chapter

7.1 Connecting Power Cables


7.2 Connecting Network Cables
7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables
7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

7.1 Connecting Power Cables

7.1.1 Connecting DC Power Cables

Context

DANGER
l To avoid electric shock, do not connect or remove power cables while the power is on.
l Insulate the power terminals and other exposed electrical parts.

NOTE

l Attach labels to the power switches that will be used during the operation.
l Attach warning labels to the power switches that cannot be used during the operation.
l Check labels on the power cables to ensure that the cables are connected correctly.

Figure 7-1 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when no
power distribution box is used.

Figure 7-1 Power cable connection without a power distribution box


DC PDF Switch

DC power
Circuit module
breaker Power cable

OT terminal
OT or cord end terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when a
1600 W DC power distribution box is used.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-2 Power cable connection with a 1600 W DC power distribution box

Cabinet
1600 W DC power
DC PDF Switch
distribution box

DC power
Circuit Power module
Circuit Power breaker cable 2
breaker cable 1
A A1

OT terminal
Cord end terminal
OT or cord end terminal

Figure 7-3 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when a
2200 W DC power distribution box is used.

Figure 7-3 Power cable connection with a 2200 W DC power distribution box

Cabinet
2200 W DC power
DC PDF Switch
distribution box

DC power
Circuit module
Circuit Power Power
breaker breaker cable 2
cable 1
A A1

OT terminal
Cord end terminal
OT or cord end terminal

NOTE

l If the 2200 W DC power distribution box has four inputs and eight outputs, use short-circuiting bars
to combine eight lines into four. Use M6 OT terminals as -48 V terminals and cord end terminals as
RTN terminals.
l If the 2200 W DC power distribution box has eight inputs and eight outputs, use cord end terminals
as input terminals.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l Labels

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the power source to which the power cables need to be connected.

Step 2 Measure the distance that the power cables will go through, and cut the DC power cables into
an appropriate length based on the measured distance.

Step 3 Identify positive and negative power cables, attach temporary labels to both ends of each
power cable, and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number the cables, see
Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables.
NOTE

By default, DC power cables delivered with a DC power module include a blue negative cable and a
black positive cable. Connect the negative cable to the NEG (-) terminal and the positive cable to the
RTN (+) terminal. Different DC power cables may be delivered in compliance with local regulations or
customer requirements.

Step 4 (Only for power cables outside the cabinet) Route the power cables along the planned paths.
Arrange the power cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) into a bundle and route
them to the cabinet along the cable tray. Lead the power cables into the cabinet from the left
side.
NOTE

l To connect cables in the cabinet more conveniently, you can remove the side panels of the cabinet
before connecting cables.
l Use appropriate force on the cables. Dragging cables with too much force may damage them.

Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.

Step 6 Connect power cables to power modules.


1. Place the required power cables near the switch.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the power terminal cover, take off the
screw and power terminal cover, and save them for later use. See callout 1 in Figure 7-4.
3. (Optional) Cut the cables to the required length, and then crimp OT terminals on the
cable ends. For details on how to crimp OT terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the power terminals, take off the
screws and washers, and save them for later use. See callout 2 in Figure 7-4.
5. Connect the positive and negative power cables to the positive and negative power
terminals on the power module. Put the screws through the washers and OT terminals on
the power cables, and then tighten the screws. See callout 3 in Figure 7-4.
6. Install the power terminal cover and secure it with the screw. See callout 4 in Figure 7-4.
NOTE

The methods for connecting OT and JG bare crimp terminals are similar. The OT bare crimp
terminal is used as an example here.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-4 Connecting power cables to a power module

3
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

PWR6
PWR5

4
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485

)
RS485

EG(-)
EG( RTN(+)
NEG(-)
≤75
kg(165 N(+)
RTN(+)
lb) EG(-)
EG(
NEG(-)
MON
MON

ON

ON

CMUA CMUA

2
OFF 1
INPUT
OFF
INPUT ALM

ALM

Step 7 Connect power cables to the power distribution box or PDF.


l If a power distribution box is used, connect power cables to the power distribution box
and then to the PDF.
l If no power distribution box is used, connect power cables directly to the PDF.
Generally, power terminals on the power distribution box and PDF are cord end terminals or
OT terminals.
l If OT terminals are used:
a. Place the required power cables near the power distribution box or PDF.
b. (Optional) Cut the cables to the required length, and then crimp OT terminals on the
cable ends. For details on how to crimp OT terminals, see Assembling Power
Cables.
c. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the power terminals, take off the
screws and washers, and save them for later use. See Figure 7-5.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-5 Removing screws from power terminals

d. Connect the positive and negative power cables to the positive and negative power
terminals. Put the screws through the washers and OT terminals on the power
cables, and then tighten the screws. See Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Securing power cables with screws

l If cord end terminals are used:


a. (Optional) Cut the cables to the required length, and then crimp cord end terminals
on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp cord end terminals, see Assembling
Power Cables.
b. Loosen the screws on the power terminals to which the power cables will be
connected. See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Loosening screws on power terminals

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

c. Insert the cord end terminals of the positive and negative cables to the positive and
negative power terminals, respectively, and then tighten the screws. See Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 Securing power cables with screws

Step 8 Arrange and bundle the power cables on the left side of the cabinet. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Bundling power cables

1
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

)
((-))
G(-
EG RTN(+
NE
)
(-))
G(-
EG RTN(+
NE

ON

ON

OFF
INPUT PWR5
PWR6

OFF CMU

INPUT ALM PWR4


PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM

ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485

)
RS485

EG(-)
EG( RTN(+
NEG(-)
≤75
kg(165 N(+))
RTN(+
lb) EG(-)
EG
NEG(-)
MON
MON

ON

ON

CMUA CMUA

2
OFF 1
INPUT
OFF
INPUT ALM

ALM

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

NOTE

l Ensure that power cables do not block power switches or indicators, or hinder installation of other
power modules. See callout 1 in Figure 7-9.
l Route power cables from the left side of the cabinet and bundle them with cable ties at 200-mm
intervals. Do not bundle power cables at the bent part.
l Bundle power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power cables are not crossed or twisted.

----End

7.1.2 Connecting AC Power Cables

Context

DANGER
l To avoid electric shock, do not connect or remove power cables while the power is on.
l Insulate the power terminals and other exposed electrical parts.

NOTE

l Before installing or removing a power module, remove the power cable from it.
l A 2200 W AC power module is used with a 2200 W AC power distribution box and an AC power
cable with a C19 straight female connector. An 800 W AC power module is used with an 800 W AC
power distribution box and an AC power cable with a C13 straight female connector.
l The AC power cables delivered with a switch can only be used on this switch.
l Attach labels to the power switches that will be used during the operation.
l Attach warning labels to the power switches that cannot be used during the operation.
l Check labels on the power cables to ensure that the cables are connected correctly.

Figure 7-10 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when no
power distribution box is used.

Figure 7-10 Power cable connection without any power distribution box

AC PDF Switch

AC power
Circuit module
Power cable
breaker
A

OT or cord end terminal

Figure 7-11 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when a
power distribution box is used.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-11 Power cable connection with a power distribution box


Cabinet
AC power
AC PDF Switch
distribution box

AC power
Power module
Circuit Power Circuit
breaker breaker cable 2
cable 1
A A1

Cord end terminal


OT or cord end terminal

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l Labels

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the power source to which the power cables need to be connected.
Step 2 Measure the distance that the power cables will go through, and cut the AC power cables into
an appropriate length according to the measured length.
Step 3 Identify wires of the power cables, attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable,
and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number the cables, see Engineering
Labels for AC Power Cables.
NOTE

By default, 3-wire AC power cables (with brown, blue, and yellow-green wires) are delivered. Connect
the brown wire to the L terminal, blue wire to the N terminal, and the yellow-green to the ground
terminal. Different AC power cables may be delivered in compliance with local regulations or customer
requirements.

Step 4 (Only for power cables outside the cabinet) Route the power cables along the planned paths.
Arrange the power cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) into a bundle and route
them to the cabinet along the cable tray. Lead the power cables into the cabinet from the left
side.
NOTE

l To connect cables in the cabinet more conveniently, you can remove the side panels of the cabinet
before connecting cables.
l Use appropriate force on the cables. Dragging cables with too much force may damage the cables.

Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end to the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Step 6 Connect power cables to power modules.


1. Connect the plug of an AC power cable to the power socket on the corresponding power
module. See callout 1 in a of Figure 7-12.
2. Secure the power cable plug with the metal or plastic locking latch on the AC power
module. See callout 2 and callout 3 in a of Figure 7-12.
NOTE

An 800 W AC power module has a metal locking latch, and a 2200 W AC power module has a
plastic locking latch.

Figure 7-12 Connecting a power cable to a power module


Plastic locking latch

13
1
4

32
2

Metal locking latch

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

2
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

1
PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
2
ON
RUN
1
ALM

ALM
FAULT

FAULT OFF
OFF

Step 7 Connect power cables to the power distribution box or power distribution frame (PDF).
l If a power distribution box is used, connect power cables to the power distribution box
and then to the PDF.
NOTE

Follow these rules to route the power cables:


– Cables at the rear of the AC power distribution box: routed from top to bottom
– Cables at the bottom of the AC power distribution box: routed from rear to front
– Cables at the front of the AC power distribution box: routed from bottom to terminals
l If no power distribution box is used, connect power cables to the PDF directly.
Generally, power terminals on the power distribution box and PDF are cord end terminals or
OT terminals.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

l If OT terminals are used:


a. Place the required power cables near the power distribution box or PDF.
b. (Optional) Cut off redundant cables according to the required length, and then
crimp OT terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp OT terminals,
see Assembling Power Cables.
c. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the power terminals, take off
the screws and washers, and save them for later use. See Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13 Removing screws from power terminals

d. Connect wires of power cables to the corresponding power terminals. Put the
screws through the washers and OT terminals on the power cables, and then tighten
the screws. See Figure 7-14.
NOTE

n Connect a brown wire (live wire) to an L terminal.


n Connect a blue wire (neutral wire) to an N terminal.
n Connect a yellow-green wire (earth wire) to a PE terminal.

Figure 7-14 Securing power cables with screws

l If cord end terminals are used:


a. (Optional) Cut off redundant cables according to the required length, and then
crimp cord end terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp cord end
terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.
b. Loosen the screws on the power terminals to which the power cables will be
connected (retain the screws on the terminals). See Figure 7-15.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-15 Loosening screws on power terminals

c. Insert the cord end terminals of power cables to the power terminals, and then
tighten the screws. See Figure 7-16.

Figure 7-16 Securing power cables with screws

Step 8 Arrange and bundle the power cables on the left side of the cabinet. See Figure 7-17.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-17 Bundling power cables

ETH
CON

1
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
ON PWR4
RUN PWR3

ON PWR2

RUN/ALM
RUN PWR1
RUN/ALM
ALM

ACT
ACT

ALM
FAULT
RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165

FAULT
lb)

OFF
MON
MON

OFF
CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
2
ON
RUN
1
ALM

ALM
FAULT

FAULT OFF
OFF

NOTE

l Ensure that power cables do not block power switches, indicators or hinder installation of other
power modules. See callout 1 in Figure 7-17.
l Route power cables from the left side of the cabinet and bundle them with cable ties at 200-mm
intervals. Do not bundle power cables at the bent part.
l Bundle power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power cables are not crossed or twisted.

----End

7.2 Connecting Network Cables

Context
NOTE

l To connect cables in a cabinet more conveniently, you can remove the side panels of the cabinet
before connecting cables.
l When cables with large diameters are used in an N66E cabinet, there may not be sufficient space for
the cables. For example, if Category 6 cables are used on 48-port electrical interface cards in an N66
cabinet, the front door of the cabinet may be unable to close.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l Network cable labels
l Tweezers (delivered with the switch)

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling route.

Step 2 Select network cables of appropriate quantity and lengths based on the number of ports and
measured cabling distances.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels on both ends of each network cable and write numbers on the labels.
For details on how to number network cables, see Engineering Labels for Network Cables.
Step 4 (Optional) Route network cables on the planned path. Arrange the network cables straight,
bundle the network cables (at most 20 cables in a bundle), and route them to a cabinet through
the cable tray. Lead the network cables into the cabinet from the right side.
Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 6 Connect network cables to ports of the switch.
1. (Optional) Find the ports matching the numbers on the network cables, cut the cables to
the required cable length, and crimp connectors on the network cables. For details, see
13.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables.
2. Plug the network cable connectors to the matching ports. See Figure 7-18. After
verifying that all network cables are correctly connected, go to Step 7.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-18 Connecting network cables

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

NOTE

If any network cable is incorrectly connected, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the
cable.

Step 7 Bundle network cables. Arrange network cables, put them through the cable management
frames on the corresponding slots, and lead the cables out of the cabinet from the right side of
the cabinet. Bundle network cables with cable ties at intervals of 20 cm to 30 cm. Use
diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties.
When a lot of cables are connected to a card, the cable management frame for this slot may
not have sufficient space. In this case, deploy cables in three layers without crossing each
other, and then put the three layers through the cable management frame. See Figure 7-19.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-19 Deploying network cables in three layers

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

Step 8 Replace all the temporary labels with permanent labels on the network cables.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Use a rope to hang the tweezers in an appropriate place in the cabinet for later use.

7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables

Context
NOTE

When cables with large diameters are used in an N66E cabinet, there may not be sufficient space for the
cables.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l High-speed cable labels

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling route.

Step 2 Select high-speed cables of appropriate quantity and lengths based on the number of ports and
measured cabling distances.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels on both ends of each high-speed cable and write numbers on the
labels. For details on how to number high-speed cables, see Engineering Labels for User
Cables.
Step 4 (Optional) Route high-speed cables on the planned path. Arrange the high-speed cables
straight and route them to a cabinet through the cable tray. Lead the high-speed cables into the
cabinet from the right side.
Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 6 Connect high-speed cables to ports of the switch. Find the ports matching the numbers on the
high-speed cables and plug cable connectors into the ports. After verifying that all high-speed
cables are correctly connected, go to Step 7.
Hold the connector of a high-speed cable in the correct direction when inserting it into a port.
When you hear a click, the high-speed cable is securely connected to the port.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-20 Connecting a high-speed cable

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

To remove a high-speed cable, gently push the cable connector and then pull the handle of the
connector. Do not forcibly pull the cable connector. See Figure 7-21.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-21 Removing a high-speed cable

CON
ETH
2
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

NOTE

The top side of a QSFP+ cable connector is the side with an L-shaped recess, as shown in Figure 7-22.
When connecting a QSFP+ cable to a port on a CSS card, make the top side face down. When
connecting a QSFP+ cable to other types of ports, make the top side face up. Do not insert the QSFP+
cable connector backwards.
Both ends of a QSFP+ high-speed cable must be covered with ESD caps.

Figure 7-22 QSFP+ high-speed cable connector

Step 7 Bundle high-speed cables. Arrange high-speed cables, put them through the cable
management frames on the corresponding slots, and lead the cables out of the cabinet from
the left side of the cabinet. Bundle high-speed cables with cable ties at intervals of 20 cm to
30 cm. Use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

When a lot of cables are connected to a card, the cable management frame for this slot may
not have sufficient space. In this case, deploy cables in three layers without crossing each
other, and then put the three layers through the cable management frame. See Figure 7-23.

Figure 7-23 Deploying high-speed cables in three layers

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

It is not recommended to connect copper cables and optical fibers to the same card because
copper cables may block the routes of optical fibers. If the copper cables and optical fibers are
used on the same card, connect the optical fibers to ports near the left side of the card and the
copper cables to ports near the right side, as shown in Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-24 Connecting copper cables and optical fibers to the same card

Step 8 Replace all the temporary labels with permanent labels on the high-speed cables.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical


Fibers

Context

NOTICE
l Do not look into bores of optical modules or connectors of optical fibers without eye
protection.
l The bend radius of an optical fiber must be 20 times larger than its diameter. Generally, the
bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 40 mm.
l Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid damage to fiber connectors.
l If a fiber connector is dirty, use an alcohol swab or a piece of air-laid paper to gently wipe
the fiber connector in one direction.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Scissors
l Insulation tape
l Corrugated pipe
l Fiber binding tape
l Engineering labels for optical fibers
l Tweezers (delivered with the switch)

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling route.

Step 2 Select optical fibers of appropriate modes, quantity, and lengths according to the optical
module types, number of ports to be connected, and measured cabling distance.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels on both ends of each optical fiber and write numbers on the labels.
For details on how to number optical fibers, see Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers.
Step 4 Unroll optical fibers and bundle them. See Table 7-1 to determine the number of optical fibers
in each bundle. Cut protection pipes into appropriate lengths according to optical fiber
lengths, and then put optical fibers through the protection pipes. Wrap both ends of a
protection pipe with adhesive tape to prevent damage to optical fibers.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

NOTICE
When routing optical fibers in a corrugated pipe, you must wrap both ends of the pipe with
adhesive tape to prevent shape edges of the pipe from damaging the optical fibers.

Table 7-1 lists the types and capacities of protection pipes.

Table 7-1 Protection pipe types and capacities


Type Maximum Number of Optical Fibers

Open corrugated pipe 60

Closed corrugated pipe 12

Winding pipe l Pipe with an external diameter of 6 mm:


10
l Pipe with an external diameter of 20
mm: 20

Step 5 (Optional) Route optical fibers from the optical distribution frame to the cabinet along the
planned path.
Open corrugated pipes are recommended. Keep 100 mm of a protection pipe inside the
cabinet, as shown in Figure 7-25.

Figure 7-25 Length of protection pipe inside the cabinet

100mm

Step 6 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 7 Remove dust plugs from the optical ports to be connected and install optical modules on the
optical ports.
Hold the connector of an optical module in the correct direction when inserting it into a port.
When you hear a click, the optical module is securely connected to the port. See Figure 7-27.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

NOTE

The top side of a QSFP+ optical module is the side with an L-shaped recess, as shown in Figure 7-26.
When connecting a QSFP+ optical module to a port on a CSS card, make the top side face down. When
connecting a QSFP+ optical module to other types of ports, make the top side face up. Do not insert the
optical module backwards.

Figure 7-26 QSFP+ optical module

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-27 Installing an optical module

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

To remove an optical module, rotate the handle down, gently push the optical module, and
then pull out the optical module by the handle. See Figure 7-28.

Figure 7-28 Removing an optical module

Step 8 Connect optical fibers to the optical modules. Remove dust plugs from the optical modules
and insert fiber connectors into the corresponding optical ports. After verifying that all optical
fibers are correctly connected, go to Step 9.
To connect optical fibers to an optical module, align the fiber connector with the bores on the
optical module and insert the fiber connector. When you hear a click, the optical fiber is
securely connected. See Figure 7-29.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-29 Connecting optical fibers to an optical module

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

To remove an optical fiber, gently push the fiber connector, and then pull the fiber connector
while pressing the locking clips. Do not forcibly pull the fiber connector. See Figure 7-30.
NOTE

If many optical fibers are connected to an interface card with a high port density, use the tweezers
delivered with the switch to remove optical fibers.

Figure 7-30 Removing optical fibers

2
0

Locking clip
1

Step 9 Bundle optical fibers. Put optical fibers through the cable management frames of the
corresponding slots and use fiber binding tapes to bundle optical fibers at 20 cm to 30 cm
intervals. See Figure 7-31.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-31 Bundling optical fibers

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ON ALM 1
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF

OFF

It is not recommended to connect copper cables and optical fibers to the same card because
copper cables may block the routes of optical fibers. If the copper cables and optical fibers are
used on the same card, connect the optical fibers to ports near the left side of the card and the
copper cables to ports near the right side, as shown in Figure 7-32.

Figure 7-32 Connecting copper cables and optical fibers to the same card

Step 10 Replace all the temporary labels on the optical fibers with permanent labels.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 7 Connecting Switches

Follow-up Procedure
Use a rope to hang the tweezers in an appropriate place in the cabinet for later use.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 8 Post-Installation Checking

8 Post-Installation Checking

Table 8-1 lists the items to be checked after you complete switch installation.

Table 8-1 Post-installation checklist

No. Check Item Method

1 The installation position of the cabinet meets the View


requirement in the associated engineering design
document.

2 Components are correctly installed in the cabinet. View


No components are loose or damaged.

3 All the screws are correctly secured. The chassis View


bottom is completely attached to the guide rails or
tray.

4 The vertical deviation of the cabinet is less than 3 Measure


mm. You can use a plumb line to measure the
vertical deviation.

5 The cabinets on the sides of the main path are Measure


aligned, with a deviation of less than 5 mm.

6 The surfaces of the cabinets in the same row are on View


the same plane. The cabinets are deployed close to
each other.

7 The front door of a cabinet can be opened and View


closed easily.

8 The cable outlets on the top and bottom of the View


cabinet are sealed.

9 All the signal cables have passed a continuity View and measure
check.

10 Routes of signal cables comply with the View


engineering design document.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 8 Post-Installation Checking

No. Check Item Method

11 The signal cables are not placed on the air vent of View
the cabinet.

12 Signal cables are not damaged or broken and have View


no splices.

13 Signal cable connectors are clean and intact, and View


correctly connected. Wires of each signal cable are
securely crimped in the connectors.

14 Signal cables do not cross each other and have View


sufficient slack at the bent part. (Signal cables can
be crossed within 1 m outside the cabinet.)

15 Each signal cable has correct, clear, and tidy labels View
attached on both ends.

16 Pigtail fibers outside a cabinet are laid in a View


protection pipe or trough and are not squeezed by
other cables or objects.

17 Optical fibers are led into a cabinet through a View and measure
corrugated pipe. The corrugated pipe in the cabinet
should be not more than 100 mm long and be
bundled onto the cabinet.

18 The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times larger View and measure
than their diameter. Generally, the bend radius of
optical fibers should be no less than 40 mm. The
path of optical fibers is not blocked by any
components.

19 Each pair of fibers is bundled by binding tape with View


appropriate force.

20 The routes of power cables and ground cables View


conform to the engineering design document,
facilitating future maintenance and system
expansion.

21 All power cables and ground cables are complete View


copper wires without splices. Coatings of power
cables and ground cables are intact.

22 Power cables and ground cables are connected View


properly. The spring washer of each ground
terminal is placed on the flat washer.

23 Diameters of power cables and ground cables View


conform to the associated engineering design
document, meeting the power distribution
requirements.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 8 Post-Installation Checking

No. Check Item Method

24 Power cables and ground cables are separated from View


signal cables.

25 Power cables and ground cables are routed View


straightly and properly bundled, with sufficient
slack at the bend part.

26 The redundant part of the power cables and ground View


cables is cut off.

27 Power cables, ground cables, and power switches View


on power distribution boxes and power distribution
frames are identified by correct, legible labels.

28 The lugs of the power cables and ground cables are View
soldered or crimped tightly.

29 Metal components in a cabinet have good electrical View


connections with the rack. Screw mounting holes,
guide rails, and mounting brackets are not covered
with insulation painting.

30 Ground busbars of adjacent cabinets are connected View


through busbar cables.

31 The yellow-green ground cables are correctly View


connected. One end of a ground cable is connected
to the PGND ground bar in the power distribution
cabinet, and the other end is connected to the
ground point on the cabinet. Screws at both ends of
the ground cable are securely fastened.

32 The removable handles are hanging at the rear of View


the chassis.

33 The new switch will not cause loops on the current View the
network. For example, this switch cannot be networking diagram
connected to another device using two links.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

Turn on the circuit breakers on the power distribution frame and power distribution box in
turn, and then turn on the power switches on the power modules of the switch. Observe
indicators of modules on the switch.

NOTE

The colors and meaning of indicators on the S9300 and S9300E switches are the same. Indicators on an
S9306 switch are used as an example here.

Figure 9-1 shows the indicators at the front of an S9306 switch.

Figure 9-1 Indicators at the front of an S9306 switch


4
Quidway S9306
LE0D
00RUB00

ACT RUN/ALM
RST

CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH


08
LE0D

LE0D
00SRUB00

00SRUB00

SYNC RST ACT RUN/ALM

CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH


07
LE0D

LE0D
00SRUB00

00SRUB00

SYNC RST ACT RUN/ALM

3
RUN/ALM

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
LE0D

LE0D
X12XSA00

X12XSA00

LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT

RUN/ALM

11
LE0D
X12XSA00

LINK
ACT
PoE1 PoE2 PoE3 PoE4
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz;15.5A

100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz;15.5A

100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz;15.5A

ON ON ON
RUN RUN RUN

ALM ALM ALM

FAULT FAULT FAULT


OFF OFF OFF

1 ON 2
RUN

ALM

FAULT
OFF

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

Figure 9-2 shows the indicators at the rear of an S9306 switch.

Figure 9-2 Indicators at the rear of an S9306 switch

ћ⾷൞伄᡽儎䙕ᰁ䖢ᰬ᧛䀜ਬ⡽έ
DON’T TOUCH THE
FAN LEAVES BEFORE
THEY SLOW DOWN !

RUN/ALM

5
ћ⾷൞伄᡽儎䙕ᰁ䖢ᰬ᧛䀜ਬ⡽έ
DON’T TOUCH THE
FAN LEAVES BEFORE
THEY SLOW DOWN !

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

Table 9-1 lists the normal indicator states after the switch is powered on.

Table 9-1 Indicator description


No. Module Indicator Color Description

1 1600 W INPUT Green Steady on: The input power is


DC power normal.
module
(S9300) ALARM Red Off: The protection circuit is
working properly.

l 800 W RUN Green Steady on: The power input is


AC normal.
power
modul ALM Yellow Off: The power module is working
e normally.
(S9300
&S930
0E)
l 2200
W AC
power
modul
e
(W2PS
A2230
)
(S9300

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

No. Module Indicator Color Description

&S930 FAULT Red Off: The power module has no


0E) unrecoverable failure.
l 2200
W DC
power
modul
e
(S9300
&S930
0E)

2 CMU RUN/AL Green Slow blinking: The system


M software of the card is running
normally.
Fast blinking: The system software
of the card is unregistered.

ACT Green Steady on: The card is the active


CMU.
Off: The card is the standby CMU.

3 LPU RUN/AL Green Steady on: The card has been


M powered on but the system
software is not running.
Slow blinking: The system
software of the card is running
normally.
Fast blinking: The system software
of the card is starting.

Yellow Steady on: The card is powered off.

4 MPU RUN/AL Green Steady on: The card has been


M powered on but the system
software is not running.
Slow blinking: The system
software of the card is running
normally.
Fast blinking: The system software
of the card is starting.

Yellow Steady on: The card is powered off.

ACT Green Steady on: The card is the active


MPU of the switch.
Off: The card is the standby MPU
of the switch.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

No. Module Indicator Color Description

5 Fan RUN/AL Green Slow blinking: The fan module is


module M working and communicating with
the system normally.
Fast blinking: The fan module is
working normally but is not
communicating with the system.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

About This Chapter

10.1 S9300 Clustering Using CSS Cards


10.2 S300E Clustering Using CSS Cards
10.3 S9300&S9300E Clustering Using Service Ports

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

10.1 S9300 Clustering Using CSS Cards

Context
The S9306 and S9312 switches support clustering using Cluster Switching System (CSS)
cards. When using this cluster mode, the switches must have double main control units
installed. In addition, the main control units must be the LE0DSRUA or LE0D00SRUB00
model, and have LE0D0VSTSA00 CSS cards installed in subcard slots.
MPUs in one chassis must be the same model. MPUs in the local and peer chassis can be
different models but are recommended to be the same model.

NOTICE
l When installing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, you can determine that it
has been installed properly after hearing a click.
l When removing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, push its connector or
handle slightly and then pull it out.
l Ensure that the bend radius of the copper cables or optical fibers is greater than the
minimum bend rand required. The minimum bend radius of a QSFP+ to QSFP+ copper
cable is 50.8 mm, and the minimum bend radius of an optical fiber is generally larger than
or equal to 40 mm.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l Labels

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure that the
ESD wrist strap is in a close contact with your wrist, and insert the other end in the ESD jack
of a cabinet/rack.
Step 2 Install a CSS card in the subcard slot of each main control unit, as shown in 6.2 (Optional)
Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard.
Step 3 Install the main control units in main control slots of the switches, as shown in 6.4 Installing
a Card.
Step 4 Attach labels on both ends of the copper cables or optical fibers, with numbers 1 to 8 on the
labels.
Step 5 Connect the QSFP+ stack ports with cluster cables.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

Quidway S9306 Quidway S9306

2 4 8 2
1 3 7 1
CSS ID CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH CSS ID CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
MASTER 1 2 3 4 LINK RUN/ALM MASTER 1 2 3 4 LINK RUN/ALM

ES0D00

ES0D00
LE0D00

LE0D00
08 08

SRUB00

SRUB00
SRUA00

SRUA00
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 VSTS SYNC ACT RUN/ALM 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 VSTS SYNC ACT RUN/ALM


RST RST

CSS ID CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH CSS ID CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
MASTER 1 2 3 4 LINK RUN/ALM
07 MASTER 1 2 3 4 LINK RUN/ALM
07

ES0D00

ES0D00
LE0D00

LE0D00
SRUB00

SRUB00
SRUA00

SRUA00
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 VSTS SYNC ACT RUN/ALM 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 VSTS SYNC ACT RUN/ALM


RST RST

5 7 4 6
6 8 3 5

PoE1 PoE2 PoE3 PoE4 PoE1 PoE2 PoE3 PoE4

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN

ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM

FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT


OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Cluster cables

NOTE

l CSS ports on the CSS cards of the S9300 must be connected.


l To connect the QSFP+ stack ports with optical fibers, install QSFP+ optical modules on the stack
ports, and then connect optical fibers to the optical modules.
l To connect the QSFP+ stack ports with QSFP+ copper cables, directly connect the copper cables to
the stack ports.
l S9306 switches are used as an example here. Cable connections between S9312 switches are the
same.

Step 6 Arrange the cables, route the cables through cable management frames, and bundle them with
cable ties.
Step 7 (Optional) Wrap redundant cables in cable management trays.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

----End

10.2 S300E Clustering Using CSS Cards

Context
The S9706 and S9712 switches support clustering using Cluster Switching System (CSS)
cards. When using this cluster mode, the switches must have double main control units
installed. In addition, the main control units must be the LE2D2SRUC000 model and have
LE2D2VS08000 CSS cards installed in subcard slots.
MPUs in one chassis must be the same model. MPUs in the local and peer chassis can be
different models but are recommended to be the same model.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

NOTICE
l A CSS card is not hot swappable.
l When installing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, you can determine that it
has been installed properly after hearing a click.
l When removing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, push its connector or
handle slightly and then pull it out.
l Ensure that the bend radius of the copper cables or optical fibers is greater than the
minimum bend rand required. The minimum bend radiuses of an SFP+ to SFP+ copper
cable and an active optical cable (AOC) are 25 mm and 30 mm, respectively. The
minimum bend radius of an optical fiber is generally larger than or equal to 40 mm.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l Labels

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure that the
ESD wrist strap is in a close contact with your wrist, and insert the other end in the ESD jack
of a cabinet/rack.
Step 2 Install a CSS card in the subcard slot of each main control unit, as shown in 6.2 (Optional)
Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard.
Step 3 Install the main control units in main control slots of the switches, as shown in 6.4 Installing
a Card.
Step 4 Attach number labels on both ends of the cluster cables.

Step 5 Connect the stack ports with cluster cables. Each CSS card has eight SFP+ ports, which are
divided into two groups. (Group 1 includes ports 1 to 4, and group 2 includes 5 to 8.) See the
following figure to connect cables between groups. Ports in a group can be connected in any
sequence, but each group must have at least one cable connected.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

S9306E S9306E

2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID CSS ID
RUN/ALM RUN/ALM
LINK/ALM ACT RUN/ALM
08 08

EH1D2
ACT RUN/ALM

EH1D2
SYNC LINK/ALM

EH1D2

EH1D2
MASTER SYNC
MASTER

SRUC000

SRUC000

SRUC000

SRUC000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

VS08 CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE VS08 CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID
07
CSS ID
RUN/ALM
LINK/ALM ACT RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM 07

EH1D2
ACT RUN/ALM

EH1D2
SYNC LINK/ALM

EH1D2

EH1D2
MASTER SYNC
MASTER

SRUC000

SRUC000

SRUC000

SRUC000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

VS08 CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE VS08 CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE

1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN

ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM

FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT


OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Group 1 Group 2 Cluster cables

NOTE

l To connect the stack ports with optical fibers, install SFP+ optical modules on the stack ports, and
then connect optical fibers to the optical modules.
l To connect the stack ports with SFP+ copper cables, directly connect the copper cables to the stack
ports.
l S9306E switches are used as an example here. Cable connections between S9712E switches are the
same.

Step 6 Arrange the cables, route the cables through cable management frames, and bundle them with
cable ties.
Step 7 (Optional) Wrap redundant cables in cable management trays.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

10.3 S9300&S9300E Clustering Using Service Ports

Context
The S9306&S9312 and S9306E&S9312E switches support service port clustering. To use this
clustering mode, each switch must have at least one main control unit. In addition, each
switch can use at most two Line Processing Units (LPUs) for cluster connection. It is
recommended that the two LPUs be the same model. The two chassis must use the same type
of ports for cluster connection, for example, 10GE SFP+ optical ports.

NOTICE
l When installing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, you can determine that it
has been installed properly after hearing a click.
l When removing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, push its connector or
handle slightly and then pull it out.
l Ensure that the bend radius of the copper cables or optical fibers is greater than the
minimum bend rand required. The minimum bend radiuses of an SFP+ to SFP+ copper
cable, QSFP+ to QSFP+ copper cable, and active optical cable (AOC) are 25 mm, 50.8
mm, and 30 mm, respectively. The minimum bend radius of an optical fiber is generally
larger than or equal to 40 mm.

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver
l Diagonal pliers
l Cable ties
l Labels

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure that the
ESD wrist strap is in a close contact with your wrist, and insert the other end in the ESD jack
of a cabinet/rack.
Step 2 Install LPUs in the planned slots of the switches, as shown in 6.4 Installing a Card.

Step 3 Attach number labels on both ends of the cluster cables.

Step 4 Connect the stack ports with cluster cables.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

The two ends must have same type and quantity


of member ports. Member ports on one end can
be connected to any member ports on the other end.

Recommended: Install LPUS symmetrically beside MPU slots

Switch A Switch B

Logical CSS port Physical member port Cluster cable


MPU slots LPU slots

NOTE

l To connect the stack ports with optical fibers, install optical modules on the stack ports, and then
connect optical fibers to the optical modules.
l To connect the stack ports with copper cables, directly connect the copper cables to the stack ports.

Step 5 Arrange the cables, route the cables through cable management frames, and bundle them with
cable ties.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

11 Maintaining Switches

About This Chapter

NOTE

l Properly save the items that do not need repair (such as the optical modules and cables for the faulty
component).
l Unless otherwise specified, pluggable modules of a switch support hot swap.

11.1 Replacing a Power Module


11.2 Replacing a Fan Module
11.3 Replacing a Service Card
11.4 Replacing an MPU
11.5 Replacing an Optical Module
11.6 Replacing an Air Filter

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

11.1 Replacing a Power Module

Context

CAUTION
l Before replacing a power module, turn off the power switch on the power module, and
then turn off the corresponding circuit breaker in the power distribution cabinet to power
off the power module.
l Be careful of the heat on a power module when replacing it.
l When removing a power module, do not touch the operating power modules with your
body or any tools to avoid electric shocks or short circuits.

To replace the power modules in a running switch, take the following measures to avoid
impact of the replacement on the running services:

l If there are empty power slots in the switch, install a new power module in an empty slot
first. Remove the power module to be replaced after the new power module starts to
work normally. Then replace other power modules one by one.
l If all the power slots in the switch are occupied, determine whether replacing a power
module will affect the running services. It is recommended that you replace the power
modules one by one, and replace the next one when the new power module works
normally.
NOTE

The following procedure replaces a vertically installed power module. The procedure for replacing a
horizontally installed power module is similar.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Find the power module that needs to be replaced.

Before replacing a power module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the power module
is installed, find the power module in the chassis, and attach a label on the panel of the power
module to avoid misoperation.

Step 2 Turn the power switch on the power module to the OFF position, and then turn off the
corresponding circuit breaker in the power distribution cabinet to power off the power
module.

Step 3 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end to the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Step 4 Remove the power cable from the power module to be replaced.

Perform the following steps to remove the AC power cable from an AC power module.

Release the plastic or metal locking latch on the AC power module, and then remove the AC
power cable. See Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1 Removing an AC power cable


Plastic locking latch

a b c

2
1
2

Metal locking latch

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1

1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

2
PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA CMUA

ON
RUN
2
ON
RUN
1
ALM

ALM
FAULT

FAULT OFF
OFF

Perform the following steps to remove the DC power cables from a DC power module.

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the power terminal cover, and then
remove the cover. See callout 1 in Figure 11-2.
2. Loosen the screws on the DC power terminals, take out the DC power cables and screws,
and save them for later use. See callout 2 in Figure 11-2.
NOTE

The methods for removing an OT terminal and a JG terminal from a DC power module are the
same. An OT terminal is used as an example here.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-2 Removing DC power cables

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

2
PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485

)
RS485

EG(-)
EG( RTN(+)
NEG(-)
)
≤75
kg(165
EG(-)
E RTN(+)
lb)
NEG(-)
MON
MON

ON

ON

CMUA CMUA

2
OFF 1
INPUT
OFF
INPUT ALM

ALM

Step 5 Remove the power module.


1. Rotate the Phillips screwdriver counterclockwise to loosen the captive screw on the
ejector lever of the power module. See callout 1 in Figure 11-3.
2. Raise the ejector lever to release the power module from the backplane. See callout 2 in
Figure 11-3.
3. Slowly pull out the power module with one hand and hold the power module with the
other hand. See callout 3 in Figure 11-3.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-3 Removing a power module

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75

2
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

3
ON
RUN
1 PWR5
PWR6

CMU
ALM PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

FAULT
PWR1
ACT
ACT

OFF
RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA
CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ALM 1
FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

ON
RUN

ALM

FAULT

OFF

Step 6 Insert the new power module into the power module slot.
1. Hold the new power module with one hand on the front panel and the other hand under
the bottom. Slowly push the power module along the guide rails in the slot, until the
power module is completely attached to the backplane. See callout 1 in Figure 11-4.
2. Lower the ejector lever until it is securely attached to the power module. See callout 2 in
Figure 11-4.
3. Rotate the Phillips screwdriver clockwise to tighten the captive screw on the ejector
lever. See callout 3 in Figure 11-4.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-4 Installing a power module

2
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

1 RUN/ALM

3
46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
ON 24 25
26 27
28 29

RUN 18 19
20 21
22 23
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2
ALM 1
3

FAULT

OFF

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA
CMUA

ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ON ALM
RUN 2
ALM 1
FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

ON
RUN

ALM

FAULT

OFF

Step 7 Connect power cables according to 7.1.1 Connecting DC Power Cables or 7.1.2 Connecting
AC Power Cables.

Step 8 Turn on the corresponding circuit breaker in the power distribution cabinet to power on the
new power module.

Step 9 Verify the functions of the new power module.

Turn on the new power module and check whether the power module functions normally.

l Observe the RUN status indicator on the power module. If the indicator is steady green,
the power module is working normally. If the indicator turns red, the power module does
not work normally.
l Run the display device command to check the running status of the power module.

If the new power module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for
technical support.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the power module, collect all tools. If the old power module is faulty, fill in
the Repair Transmission Sheet and send the faulty module with the Repair Transmission
Sheet to the equipment supplier or the specified repair service provider.

11.2 Replacing a Fan Module

Context

CAUTION
Be careful of the heat on a fan module when replacing it.

NOTICE
l When a fan module fails, the system generates an alarm message, which provides the slot
ID of the faulty fan module. Find the faulty fan module according to the slot ID and
replace the fan module.
l Install a new fan module in the slot within 3 minutes after a fan module is removed.

Fan module slots are numbered from top to bottom, starting with FAN1. For example, on an
S9312 switch, the first fan module slot on the top is FAN1, and the other fan module slots are
FAN2, FAN3, and FAN4 from top to bottom. See Figure 11-5.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-5 Fan slot numbers on the S9312

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Find the fan module to be replaced.
Before removing a fan module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the fan module is
installed, find the fan module in the chassis, and attach a label on the panel of the fan module
to avoid misoperation.
Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 3 Remove the old fan module from the chassis.
1. Loosen the four captive screws counterclockwise on both sides of the fan module with a
Phillips screwdriver. See callout 1 in Figure 11-6.
2. Hold the fan module with both hands and gently pull out the fan module. See callout 2 in
Figure 11-6.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-6 Removing a fan module

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

1
RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

≤75
kg(165
lb)

Step 4 Install the spare fan module in the chassis.


1. Hold the fan module by two sides, align the holes on the baffle with the positioning pins
on the chassis, and attach the fan module onto the chassis. See callout 1 in Figure 11-7.
2. Tighten the captive screws clockwise with a Phillips screwdriver to secure the fan
module on the chassis. See callout 2 in Figure 11-7.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-7 Installing a fan module

Positioning pin

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

2 RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

Step 5 Verify the functions of the new fan module.


After the new fan module is installed, fans run at 40% of the full speed for about 10s. Then
the fan module works in intelligent fan speed adjustment mode. Use either of the following
methods to check whether the new fan module is functioning normally:
l Observe the indicator on the fan module. If the indicator blinks green slowly, the fan
module is working normally. If the indicator turns red, the fan module is not working
normally.
l Run the display fan command to check the running status of the fan module.
If the new fan module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for technical
support.

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the fan module, collect all tools. If the replaced fan module is faulty, fill in the
Repair Transmission Sheet and send the faulty module with the Repair Transmission Sheet
to the equipment supplier or the specified repair service provider.

11.3 Replacing a Service Card

Context
Replace a card if the card fails or the equipment needs a hardware upgrade.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Tweezers (delivered with the switch)
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.

Step 2 Select a spare card of the same type as the old card. If the spare card is different from the old
one, ensure that it can replace the old card. Make sure that no components on the new card are
damaged or missing. Record the bar code on the new card, which will be used for future
repair service.

Step 3 Record the cable locations on the old card and check whether the labels on the cables are
correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to
ensure correct cable connection on the new card.

Step 4 Remove cables from the old card.


NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable
connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable.
l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the
cables.

Step 5 Remove the card.


1. Rotate the ejector levers outward to release the card from the backplane. See callout 1 in
Figure 11-8.
NOTE

If the card to be replaced is secured in the slot with captive screws, loosen the captive screws first.
2. Grasp the ejector levers and pull out the card slowly along with the guide rails. See
callout 2 in Figure 11-8.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

NOTICE
Pull the card along the guide rails in the slot. Otherwise, the card may collide with
components on adjacent cards, causing damage to the components.

NOTE

The methods for replacing different types of cards are the same. This section uses a Line
Processing Unit (LPU) as an example.

Figure 11-8 Removing a card

10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

1
ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

ETH
CON
CLK2 ACT RUN/ALM
CLK1
RST

RUN/ALM

46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1

PWR6
PWR5
CMU
PWR4
PWR3
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM

PWR1
ACT
ACT

RS485
RS485

≤75
kg(165
lb)
MON
MON

CMUA
CMUA

ON
RUN

ON
RUN
ALM
ON
RUN 2
ON ALM
FAULT
1
RUN
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

Step 6 Install the spare card. For details, see 6.4 Installing a Card.

Step 7 Install optical modules or network cables in accordance with the recorded connections. See
7.2 Connecting Network Cables, 7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables, or 7.4 Installing
Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Step 8 Observe the RUN/ALM indicator on the new card.


NOTE
It takes less than 5 minutes for the card to start and register.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the card is starting.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the card is running normally.

Step 9 Verify the functions of the new card.

After installing a new card, check whether the card is functioning normally:

l If the RUN/ALM indicator is steady red, the card is functioning abnormally.


l Run the display device command to check the running status of the new card.

----End

11.4 Replacing an MPU

11.4.1 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are


Interrupted)

Context
If the only MPU on a switch is faulty, the replacement procedure varies depending on whether
the MPU has completely or partially failed:

l If the MPU has completely failed, services on the switch are interrupted and the
command line interface (CLI) cannot be used.
l If the MPU has partially failed, services are still running and you can run commands on
the CLI.

NOTICE
l If the old MPU is equipped with a subcard or daughter card, install a subcard or daughter
card of the same type on the new MPU.
l If the services on the old MPU are interrupted and operations cannot be performed on the
CLI, perform the following operations after the replacement:
l Check the software version of the new MPU. Ensure that the software version of the
new MPU is the same as that of the old MPU or is the required version.
l Reconfigure services on the new MPU.
l Do not touch the electronic components on an MPU. Install or remove an MPU slowly and
horizontally.
l Format the replaced CF card or the CF card on an MPU that is scrapped or returned for
repair.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Enter the BIOS menu on the MPU from the serial port and copy the configuration file and
license file from the MPU to a computer.
l If the configuration file and license file are successfully copied to the computer, perform
steps 2 to 11.
l If the configuration file and license file fail to be copied to the computer, perform steps 2
to 10.
Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 3 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no components on the new
MPU are damaged or missing.
Step 4 Record the cable locations on the old MPU and check whether the labels on the cables are
correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to
ensure correct cable connection on the new card.
Step 5 Remove cables from the old MPU.
NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable
connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable.
l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the
cables.

Step 6 Pull the old MPU out of the slot. For details, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card.
Step 7 (Optional) Remove the subcard from the old MPU and install it on the new MPU. For details
on how to install the subcard, see 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced
Flexible Service Subcard or 6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card.
If the old MPU has a subcard installed, install a subcard of the same type on the new MPU.
Ensure that the subcard installed on the new MPU can work normally.
Step 8 Install the new MPU in the chassis. For the installation procedure, see 11.3 Replacing a
Service Card.
NOTE
The system software version on the new MPU must be the same as that on the old MPU.

Step 9 View the RUN/ALM indicator on the new MPU.


NOTE

After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start and
registration process takes less than 5 minutes.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the MPU is starting.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the MPU is running normally.
Step 10 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU in accordance with the labels on the
cables.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Step 11 (Optional) If the configuration file has been copied from the old MPU, upload the
configuration file to the new MPU.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1. The CF card on an MPU saves important data, such as configuration data and system
logs. To ensure data security, format the following CF card:
– CF card on a scrapped MPU
– CF card on an MPU that will be returned for repair
– Old CF card replaced by a new one
2. Verify the functions of the new MPU.
– Run the display device command to check the running status of the new MPU.
– Run the display startup command to view the system software name and
configuration file name for next startup. The file names on the new MPU must be
the same as those on the old MPU.
NOTE
The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the software
using the CLI.

11.4.2 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Still


Running)

Context
If the only MPU on a switch is faulty, the replacement procedure varies depending on whether
the MPU has completely or partially failed:

l If the MPU has completely failed, services on the switch are interrupted and the
command line interface (CLI) cannot be used.
l If the MPU has partially failed, services are still running and you can run commands on
the CLI.

NOTICE
l If the old MPU is equipped with a subcard or daughter card, install a subcard or daughter
card of the same type on the new MPU.
l Do not touch the electronic components on an MPU. Install or remove an MPU slowly and
horizontally.
l After the new MPU is installed and powered on, it automatically synchronizes the system
software from the active MPU.
l Format the replaced CF card or the CF card on an MPU that is scrapped or returned for
repair.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 2 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no components on the new
MPU are damaged or missing.
Step 3 (Optional) Install a subcard on the new MPU. For the installation procedure, see 6.2
(Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard or 6.3
(Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card.
If the old MPU has a subcard installed, install a subcard of the same type on the new MPU.
Ensure that the subcard installed on the new MPU can work normally.
Step 4 Install the new MPU into the slot for the standby MPU. For the installation procedure, see
11.3 Replacing a Service Card.
Step 5 View the RUN/ALM indicator on the new MPU.
NOTE

After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start and
registration process takes less than 5 minutes.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the MPU is starting.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the MPU is running normally.
Step 6 Run the dir command to check whether the sizes of files (such as the configuration file) on
the new MPU are the same as those on the old MPU.
l If the file sizes are the same, the file synchronization is successful. Go to Step 8.
l If the file sizes on the two MPUs are different, go to Step 7 to manually synchronize the
files to the new MPU.
Step 7 (Optional) Save data.
1. Log in to the switch.
2. Copy the configuration file to the standby MPU using either of the following methods:
– Method 1:
Run the following command:
<Quidway> copy cfcard:/XXX.cfg slave#cfcard:/XXX.cfg

NOTE
XXX.cfg is the configuration file name.
– Method 2:
Run the save command on the client to save the configuration file to the standby
MPU.
3. Copy the license file to the standby MPU.
<Quidway> copy cfcard:/XXX.dat slave#cfcard:/XXX.dat

NOTE
XXX.dat is the license file name. Skip this step if there is no license file in the system.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Step 8 Run the startup saved-configuration command to specify the configuration file for the
standby MPU to use at the next startup.
Step 9 Run the slave switchover command to trigger an active/standby switchover.

Step 10 Run the display switchover state command to check the active/standby switchover state.
When the Switchover State field displays Ready, the switchover is complete. Go to the next
step.
Step 11 Record the cable locations on the old MPU and check whether the labels on the cables are
correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to
ensure correct cable connection on the new MPU.
Step 12 Remove cables from the old MPU.
NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable
connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable.
l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the
cables.

Step 13 Pull the old MPU out of the slot. For details, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card.

Step 14 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU in accordance with the labels on the
cables.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1. The CF card on an MPU saves important data, such as configuration data and system
logs. To ensure data security, format the following CF card:
– CF card on a scrapped MPU
– CF card on an MPU that will be returned for repair
– Old CF card replaced by a new one
2. Verify the functions of the new MPU.
– Run the display device command to check the running status of the new MPU.
– Run the display startup command to view the system software name and
configuration file name for next startup. The file names on the new MPU must be
the same as those on the old MPU.
NOTE
The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the software
using the CLI.

11.4.3 Replacing One of the MPUs on a Switch

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Context

NOTICE
l Check whether the MPU to be replaced is the active or standby MPU on the switch. If it is
the active MPU, perform an active/standby switchover. If it is the standby MPU, replace it
directly.
l You can only replace a faulty or standby MPU on a switch. Do not replace the active MPU
that is running normally (with the ACT indicator steady green).
l If the old MPU is equipped with a subcard or daughter card, install a subcard or daughter
card of the same type on the new MPU.
l Do not touch the electronic components on an MPU. Install or remove an MPU slowly and
horizontally.
l After the new MPU is installed and powered on, it automatically synchronizes the system
software from the active MPU.
l Format the replaced CF card or the CF card on an MPU that is scrapped or returned for
repair.

Tools
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 2 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no components on the new
MPU are damaged or missing.
Step 3 (Optional) Install a subcard on the new MPU. For the installation procedure, see 6.2
(Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard or 6.3
(Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card.
If the old MPU has a subcard installed, install a subcard of the same type on the new MPU.
Ensure that the subcard installed on the new MPU can work normally.
Step 4 (Optional) If the MPU to be replaced is the active MPU, run the slave switchover command
to perform an active/standby switchover.
Run the display switchover state command to check the active/standby switchover state.
When the Switchover State field displays Ready, the switchover is complete. Go to the next
step.
Step 5 Record the cable locations on the old MPU and check whether the labels on the cables are
correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to
ensure correct cable connection on the new card.
Step 6 Remove cables from the old MPU.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable
connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable.
l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the
cables.

Step 7 Remove the old MPU and install the new MPU into the slot. For details on how to remove the
MPU, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card.
Step 8 View the RUN/ALM indicator on the new MPU.
NOTE

After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start and
registration process takes less than 5 minutes.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the MPU is starting.
l If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the MPU is running normally.
Step 9 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU in accordance with the labels on the
cables.
Step 10 Run the dir command to check whether the names and sizes of files (such as the configuration
file) on the new MPU are the same as those on the old MPU.
l If the file names and sizes are the same, the file synchronization is successful. Go to Step
12.
l If the file names or sizes on the two MPUs are different, go to Step 11 to manually
synchronize the files to the new MPU.
Step 11 (Optional) Save data.
1. Log in to the switch.
2. Copy the configuration file to the new MPU using either of the following methods:
– Method 1:
Run the following command:
<Quidway> copy cfcard:/XXX.cfg slave#cfcard:/XXX.cfg

NOTE
XXX.cfg is the configuration file name.
– Method 2:
Run the save command on the client to save the configuration file to the standby
MPU.
3. Copy the license file to the standby MPU.
<Quidway> copy cfcard:/XXX.dat slave#cfcard:/XXX.dat

NOTE
XXX.dat is the license file name. Skip this step if there is no license file in the system.

Step 12 Run the startup saved-configuration command to specify the configuration file for the
standby MPU to use at the next startup.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1. The CF card on an MPU saves important data, such as configuration data and system
logs. To ensure data security, format the following CF card:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

– CF card on a scrapped MPU


– CF card on an MPU that will be returned for repair
– Old CF card replaced by a new one
2. Verify the functions of the new MPU.
– Run the display device command to check the running status of the new MPU.
– Run the display startup command to view the system software name and
configuration file name for next startup. The file names on the new MPU must be
the same as those on the old MPU.
NOTE
The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the software
using the CLI.

11.5 Replacing an Optical Module

Context

DANGER
When replacing an optical module, do not look into bores of the optical module without eye
protection. The laser emitted from the bores may injure your eyes.

NOTICE
l Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid damage to fiber connectors.
l Optical modules are electrostatic-sensitive components; therefore, you must take ESD
protective measures when replacing optical modules.
l Do not insert an optical module backwards. If an optical module cannot be completely
inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port. Turn the optical module over and
try again.

Observe the following rules to replace an optical module:

l Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves when replacing the optical module.
l Ensure that the new optical module has the same center wavelength and complies with
the same standards as the old one.
l Before removing an optical module, unplug optical fibers from the optical module. Do
not apply too much force when unplugging optical fibers. Otherwise, the optical module
may be damaged.
l After removing optical fibers from optical modules, cover the ports of cards and bores of
optical modules with dust plugs.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Tools and Accessories


l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
l Dust caps
l Dust plugs
l Alcohol swab

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.

Step 2 Record optical fiber locations on the old optical module and check whether the labels on the
optical fibers are correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to
the cables to ensure correct fiber connection on the new optical module.

Step 3 Release the locking clip on the fiber connector, gently push the fiber connector, and then pull
out the optical fiber. After removing optical fibers from the optical module, cover fiber
connectors with dust caps.

The locking clip varies on different fiber connectors. Figure 11-9 shows the locking clips on
an LC/PC connector. Hold down the locking clips when pulling the optical fibers. Figure
11-10 shows the locking clip on an MPO connector. The locking clip is released automatically
when you pull the MPO connector.

Figure 11-9 LC/PC connector

Figure 11-10 MPO connector

Step 4 Release the latch of the optical module, gently push the optical module, and then pull it out.
Cover the bores of the optical module with dust plugs.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

The latch varies on different optical modules. Figure 11-11 shows an optical module with a
clasp latch. To release the clasp latch, rotate it down. Figure 11-12 shows an optical module
with a tab latch. The tab latch is released when you pull it.

Figure 11-11 Optical module with a clasp latch

Figure 11-12 Optical module with a tab latch

Step 5 Take out the new optical module from the package. Slowly insert the optical module into the
optical port until you hear a click.
NOTE

The new optical module must have the same optical parameters as the remote optical module connected
to it.

Step 6 Find the optical fibers to be connected to the optical module according to labels on the optical
fibers. Remove the dust caps from the fiber connectors and insert the optical fibers to bores of
the optical module.
NOTE

If the optical module does not work, use an alcohol swab to wipe the fiber connectors in one direction,
and then connect the optical fibers to the optical module again.

----End

11.6 Replacing an Air Filter

Context
To prevent the air filter of a switch from being blocked by dust and to ensure efficient heat
dissipation of a switch, periodically replace the air filter. It is recommended that you replace

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

an air filter at least once every six months. When a switch is used in a dusty environment,
replace its air filter more frequently.

NOTE

The methods for replacing the air filters on different models are the same. This section uses S9312E as
an example to describe the replacement procedure.

Tools
l Phillips screwdriver
l ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

Procedure
Step 1 Determine in which cabinet and chassis the air filter is installed, find the air filter in the
chassis, and attach a label on the air filter to avoid misoperation.
Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert
the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded.
Step 3 Remove the air filter.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on the air filter. See callout 1 in
Figure 11-13.
2. Slowly pull the air filter out. See callout 2 in Figure 11-13.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-13 Removing an air filter

2
N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

≤75
kg(165
lb)

Step 4 (Optional) For an S9300 chassis, replace the sponge on the air filter. For an S9300E chassis,
replace the air filter.
Step 5 Install the air filter.
1. Slowly insert the air filter into the chassis. See callout 1 in Figure 11-14.
2. Tighten the captive screws on the filter with the Phillips screwdriver. See callout 2 in
Figure 11-14.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-14 Installing an air filter

1
N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

N
CAUTIO
keep fingers
moving parts,
Hazardous away.
body parts ʽ
and other
䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

RUN/ALM

≤75
kg(165
lb)

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

About This Chapter

12.1 A Card Resets Unexpectedly


12.2 A Card Fails to Register
12.3 Files Cannot Be Written into the CF Card
12.4 A Power Module Does Not Work Normally

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

12.1 A Card Resets Unexpectedly


Fault Description
A device generates card reset alarms.

Possible Causes and Troubleshooting Procedure


Run the display reset-reason command to check the reason why a card is reset.
Table 12-1 lists common reasons of card resets and solutions.

Table 12-1 Common reasons for card resets and solutions


Reason Solution

System Reset for patch get state fail l It is normal when such resets
loading occur one or two times during
Reset for patch load file fail system startup.
Reset for patch synchronize file fail l When such resets occur multiple
times, collect information, and
Reset for patch state compare fail obtain technical support through
the Huawei Technical Support
Website.

Reset slave board for memsize too Replace the slave MPU to ensure that
little the master and slave MPUs have the
same memory size.

Reset for slave board's card statement One of the MPUs is equipped with a
disaccord with master's subcard. Remove the subcard or
install a subcard of the same type on
the other MPU.

User Reset by user command A user has reset the card using the
operation command line interface or network
s Power off by user command management system. Confirm with
VRP reset selfboard because of this user about the reset.
command

Reset board by vrp cmd

Reset board by snmp

Reset for rollback

The demo time of license is overtime The temporary license loaded on the
card has expired. Apply for a license
from Huawei.

Software VRP reset selfboard because of find Collect information, and obtain
deadloop technical support through the Huawei
Technical Support Website.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Reason Solution

Board reset by VRP for schedule

VRP reset selfboard because of find


exception

Device Reset for no receiving mpu's heart


managem
ent Reset for no heart

Reset for not receiving register ack


from mpu

Reset for state not stable Reinstall the card in the same slot or
another slot. If the problem persists,
collect information, and obtain
technical support through the Huawei
Technical Support Website.

Warm reset board for no register in a Collect information, and obtain


long time technical support through the Huawei
Technical Support Website.
Warm reset board for no receiving
message in a long time

Cold reset board for no receiving


message in a long time

Cold reset board for CPU is not


active

Reset for unregister but receive


heartbeat info

Reset for slave board class disaccord The master and slave MPUs are
with mpu different models. Replace one of
them to ensure that the two MPUs are
the same model.

Reset for lpu or slave version Collect information, and obtain


disaccord with mpu technical support through the Huawei
Technical Support Website.
Reset for no receiving master cpu's
heart

Compone Reset for selftest fail Remove and reinstall the card or
nts install it in another slot. If the
Reset for CPLD self-test fail problem persists, collect information,
Reset selfboard because of initialize and obtain technical support through
fsu fail the Huawei Technical Support
Website.
Reset for fpga load failed

Reset for fpga in abnormal state

Reset for lanswitch chip parity error

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Reason Solution

Temperat A card may reset when the operating 1. Run the display temperature all
ure temperature is too high. command. In the command
output, the Status field shows
whether the chassis temperature is
within the normal range, and the
Temperature.(C) field displays
the temperature of each
component. If the Status field
displays minor, go to step 2.
2. Check the heat dissipation system
of the switch. Check the air intake,
air exhaust, fan trays, and air
filters to ensure that:
l The air intakes (at the front
and left side of the chassis) are
not blocked. There is no other
device on the left side of the
switch or the adjacent device is
separated by a side panel of the
cabinet.
l The air exhaust (at the rear of
the chassis) is not blocked.
Fans are running normally.
l The air filters are clean and not
blocked so that air can enter
the chassis.
If the card temperature falls within
the normal range, the card can
work normally.
If the card temperature remains
high, go to step 3.
3. Remove and reinstall the card, and
check whether the card can
register successfully. If the card
fails to register, go to step 4.
4. Collect information, and obtain
technical support through the
Huawei Technical Support
Website.

12.2 A Card Fails to Register


Fault Description
l The card registration process lasts a long time, and the RUN/ALM indicator of the card
is steady yellow.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

l After the display device command is executed, the Register field of a card displays
Unregistered.

Possible Causes
This fault is commonly caused by one of the following:

l The card is not properly installed.


l The card is not hot swappable but it has been unplugged and plugged while the power is
on.
l Alarms have been generated for electronic devices on the card.
l The available power is insufficient for the card.
l The card is not supported by the chassis model or software version.
l The card connector has failed.
l The card cannot load the software package because the configuration has not been
cleared.
l No startup file is saved in the CF card.

Troubleshooting Procedure
1. Check whether the card is correctly installed. If not, reinstall the card. If the card is
correctly installed, go to step 2.
2. Check whether a subcard on the MPU has been hot swapped. If so, go to step 7. If not,
go to step 3.
3. Run the display alarm command to check alarms about the card. If the command output
contains alarms about abnormal voltage or components, go to step 7. If not, go to step 4.
4. Run the display power system command to check the power of the system and card. If
the available system power is insufficient, go to step 7. If the available system power is
sufficient, go to step 5.
NOTE

An LE0DG48VEA00 card can successfully register only when the following conditions are met:
l A dual in-line memory module (DIMM) has been installed in the DIMM slot of the card.
l The PoE interface card is installed in a PoE chassis.
l The PoE power modules are supplying power to the chassis normally.
5. Run the display version command to check whether the model and version of the card
match the chassis. If not, replace the card with a card matching the chassis. If the card
matches the chassis, go to step 6.
All cards are interchangeable on the S9300 and S9300E chassis except the following:
LH2D2SRUDC00, LE2D2SRUDC00/LE2D2SRUDC01, LE0MSRUA, LE0DSRUA,
LE0D00SRUB00, LH2D2MCUA000, LE0MMCUA, LE0D0VAMPA00,
LE0DG48VEA00, LE0D0WMNPA00, and LE2D2X48SEC0.
NOTE

If a card is moved from a chassis running a later version to a chassis running an earlier version, the
BootROM and Bootload of the card may automatically change to the earlier version. As a result,
the card cannot restart when it is reinstalled in the chassis running the later version. When this
occurs, download the later-version software package from the Huawei official website, load the
software package on the card, and then run the upgrade jtag slot slot-id command in the
diagnostic view to update BootROM and Bootload to the later version.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

6. Remove and reinstall the card or install it in another slot.


Remove the card from the slot and check whether the card connector is intact.
If the card connector is intact, install the card in the original slot. If the card still fails to
register after being reinstalled several times, install it in another slot. If the problem
persists, go to step 7.
If there are idle pin holes on the card connector, use a flashlight to illuminate the card
connector and check whether any pins are bent. If some pins are bent, go to step 7.
7. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support
Website.

12.3 Files Cannot Be Written into the CF Card


Fault Description
Files cannot be saved to the CF card on the MPU.

Possible Causes
This fault is commonly caused by one of the following:
l The CF card space is insufficient.
l The CF card is damaged.
l The file system is damaged.

Troubleshooting Procedure
1. Check free space on the CF card.
Run the dir command in the user view to check whether the CF card has sufficient free
space.
If free space on the CF card is insufficient for the file to be saved, copy the log files on
the CF card to the local storage device, and then delete the log files from the CF card to
free up the space.
If free space on the CF card is sufficient for the file to be saved, the CF card may be
damaged. Go to step 3.
2. Run the format command to format the CF card. If the problem persists after the CF
card is formatted, go to step 3.
3. Replace the CF card.
NOTE

Use a Huawei-certified CF card.


If the problem persists after the CF card is replaced, go to step 4.
4. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support
Website.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

12.4 A Power Module Does Not Work Normally


Fault Description
The device generates a power module alarm, and the RUN or INPUT indicator on the power
module is off.

Possible Causes and Troubleshooting Procedure

DANGER
Protect yourself from electric shock when you are touching a power module.

Analyze the cause of the fault according to keywords in the alarm message and indicator
status on the power module.
Run the display alarm { all | slot slot-id } command to check alarms about the faulty power
module.
800 W AC power module, 2200 W DC power module, and 2200 W AC power module
Table 12-2 describes keywords in alarms about an 800 W AC power module, 2200 W DC
power module, and 2200 W AC power module, indicator status on these power modules, and
troubleshooting methods in different situations.

Table 12-2 Power module alarm keywords


Alarm Possible Description Solution
Keyword Indicator
Status

PWR_FAUL l The RUN General power 1. Run the display device


T indicator module alarm. command to check whether the
is off. CMU is working normally.
l The ALM If the CMU is not working
indicator normally, see A Card Fails to
is steady Register to handle the problem.
yellow. If the problem persists, go to
l The ALM step 5.
indicator If the CMU recovers, go to step
is 2.
blinking 2. Check whether the input voltage
yellow. of the power module is normal.
l The Use a multimeter to measure the
FAULT voltage of the external power
indicator source.
is steady
red.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Alarm Possible Description Solution


Keyword Indicator
Status

MODE_FAU l The RUN l Fans of the Select DC voltage measurement


LT indicator power module on the multimeter and use the
is off. have failed. test probes to measure the
l The ALM l The output voltage.
indicator voltage of the If the input voltage of the power
is steady power module module is normal, check
yellow. exceeds the whether the power switch on the
upper threshold. power module is turned on. If
l The ALM
so, go to step 3.
indicator l The output
is voltage of the If the input voltage is out of the
blinking power module is normal range, check the power
yellow. below the lower cable connected to the power
threshold. module and switch of the
l The
external power source. If the
FAULT
power cable and external power
indicator
source are both working
is steady
normally, go to step 3.
red.
3. Reinstall the power module in
MODE_PRO l The RUN l The circuit the same slot and check whether
TECT indicator breaker of the the power module works
is off. power module is normally. If the fault persists, go
l The ALM switched off. to step 4.
indicator l The power 4. Install the power module in
is steady module is in another slot and check whether
yellow. overtemperature the power module works
protection state. normally. If the fault persists, go
l The ALM
to step 5.
indicator l The power
is module is in 5. Collect information, and obtain
blinking overcurrent technical support through the
yellow. protection state. Huawei Technical Support
Website.
l The power
module is in
overvoltage
protection state.
l The power
module is in
undervoltage
protection state.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Alarm Possible Description Solution


Keyword Indicator
Status

DROP l The RUN The power module Check whether the power cable
indicator encountered a connected to the power module is
is off. power failure. loose. If so, connect the power
l The ALM cable properly. If not, replace the
indicator power cable.
is
blinking
yellow.

FAN_FAULT l The RUN Fans of the power 1. Reinstall the power module in
indicator module have failed. the same slot and check whether
is off. the power module works
l The ALM normally. If the fault persists, go
indicator to step 2.
is 2. Install the power module in
blinking another slot and check whether
yellow. the power module works
l The normally. If the fault persists, go
FAULT to step 3.
indicator 3. Collect information, and obtain
is steady technical support through the
red. Huawei Technical Support
Website.

1600 W DC power module


Table 12-3 describes the keywords in alarms about a 1600 W DC power module, indicator
status on the power module, and troubleshooting methods in different situations.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Table 12-3 Power module alarm keywords


Alarm Possible Description Solution
Keyword Indicator
Status

DC l The No input 1. Check that the input voltage of the


PWR_FAU INPUT power is power module is normal.
LT indicato available. Use a multimeter to measure the voltage
r is off. of the external power source.
l The Select DC voltage measurement on the
ALM multimeter and use the test probes to
indicato measure the voltage.
r is
steady If the input voltage of the power module
red. is normal, check whether the power
switch on the power module is turned
on. If so, go to step 2.
If the input voltage is out of the normal
range, check the power cable connected
to the power module and switch of the
external power source. If the power
cable and external power source are both
working normally, go to step 2.
2. Reinstall the power module in the same
slot. Check whether the power module
works normally. If the fault persists, go
to step 3.
3. Reinstall the power module in another
slot. Check whether the power module
works normally. If the fault persists, go
to step 4.
4. Collect information, and obtain technical
support through the Huawei Technical
Support Website.

DC l The The input Measure the voltage of the external power


PWR_LAC INPUT voltage of the source. Ensure that the power source can
K indicato power module supply power to the power module
r is off. is below the normally.
l The lower
ALM threshold.
indicato
r is
steady
red.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Alarm Possible Description Solution


Keyword Indicator
Status

DC l The The power Check the power switch of the power


SWITCH_ INPUT module is module. If the power switch is turned off,
STA indicato turned off. turn it on.
r is off.
l The
ALM
indicato
r is
steady
red.

DC The ALM The fuse of the 1. Unplug and plug the CMU in the same
FUSE_FA indicator is power module CMU slot, and check whether the alarm
ULT steady red. is damaged. is cleared. If the fault persists, go to step
2.
2. Install the CMU in the other CMU slot
and check whether the alarm is cleared.
If the fault persists, go to step 3.
3. Reinstall the power module in the same
slot and check whether the power
module works normally. If the fault
persists, go to step 4.
4. Install the power module in another slot
and check whether the power module
works normally. If the fault persists, go
to step 5.
5. Collect information, and obtain technical
support through the Huawei Technical
Support Website.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

13 Appendix

About This Chapter

13.1 Appendix A List of Indicators


13.2 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation
13.3 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation
13.4 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications
13.5 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables
13.6 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules
13.7 Appendix G Fault Tag

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

13.1 Appendix A List of Indicators

Power Module Indicators


Table 13-1 lists the indicators on power modules and describes the meaning of each indicator
state.

Table 13-1 Description of power module indicators


Module Indicator Color Description

l 800 W RUN Green Steady on: The power input is normal.


AC Off: The power module is experiencing
power an unrecoverable failure or has stopped
module supplying power due to overtemperature,
l 2200 W input overvoltage, or input undervoltage.
AC
power ALM Yellow Steady on: The power module has
module stopped supplying power due to
(W2PSA overtemperature, input overvoltage, input
2230) undervoltage, or output overcurrent.
l 2200 W Blinking: Communication with the
DC monitoring device (MCU or CMU) has
power been interrupted.
module Off: The power module is working
normally.

FAULT Red Steady on: The power module is


experiencing an unrecoverable failure.
Off: The power module has no
unrecoverable failure.

l 1600 W INPUT Green Steady on: The input power is normal.


DC Off: No input power is available.
power
module OUTPUT Green Steady on: The output power of the power
l 2400 W module is in the normal range.
DC Off: The power module provides no
power output power.
module
ALARM Red Steady on: The protection circuit has
failed.
Off: The protection circuit is functioning
normally.

MPU Indicators
Table 13-2 lists the indicators on an MPU and describes the meaning of each indicator state.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-2 Description of MPU indicators


Indicator Color Description

RUN/ALM Green Steady on: The card has been powered on but the
system software is not running.
Slow blinking: The system software of the card is
running normally.
Fast blinking: The system software of the card is
starting.

Red Steady on: The card has failed.

Yellow Steady on: The card is powered off.

ACT Green Steady on: The card is the active MPU of the
switch.
Off: The card is the standby MPU of the switch.

CMU Indicators
Table 13-3 lists the indicators on an CMU and describes the meaning of each indicator state.

Table 13-3 Description of CMU indicators


Indicator Color Description

RUN/ALM Green Slow blinking: The card software is running


properly.
Fast blinking: The card software is unregistered.

Red Steady on: The card has failed, and the fault
requires manual intervention.
Slow blinking: The switch is reporting an alarm.
For example, a CMU, fan module, or power
module on the switch fails.
Fast blinking: The input power is insufficient.

ACT Green Steady on: The card is the active CMU.


Off: The card is the standby CMU.

Service Card Indicators


Table 13-4 lists the indicators on a service card and describes the meaning of each indicator
state.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-4 Description of service card indicators


Indicator Color Description

RUN/ALM Green Steady on: The card has been powered on but the
system software is not running.
Slow blinking: The system software of the card is
running normally.
Fast blinking: The system software of the card is
starting.

Red Steady on: The card has failed.

Yellow Steady on: The card is powered off.

Fan Module Indicator


Table 13-5 lists the indicator on a fan module and describes the meaning of each indicator
state.

Table 13-5 Description of fan module indicator


Indicator Color Description

RUN/ALM Green Slow blinking: The fan module is working and


communicating with the system normally.
Fast blinking: The fan module is working
normally but is not communicating with the
system.

Red Fast blinking: An alarm has been generated. You


must check the fan module onsite to determine
whether to replace it.
Steady on: The fan module has a hardware failure
and needs to be replaced.

13.2 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation

13.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions

Checking the Appearance of Cables


l If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.
l If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing, or other
defects, do not use the cable.
l If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

l If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted, discard this cable
and check whether other cables have the same problem. If other cables have the same
problem, replace these cables.

Checking the Appearance of Connectors


l Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust or scuffing.
l Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven plating, or their
pins are lost, broken, or bent.
l Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there are
conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.

Precautions for Assembly


l Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods given here
during assembly.
l Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when installing or
removing cable components.
l Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:
– Make cables slightly longer than necessary.
– Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the coils using
bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be larger than 20 times the
outer diameters of the cables.
– When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers (braid or
aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets that do not need to be
stripped.
– After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure that the
cross sections are arranged neatly.
– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate exposed
conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that the surface of the
conductors does not become oxidized.
l Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are crimped.
They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.
NOTE

The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The figures in this
document are for your reference only.

13.2.2 Assembling Power Cables

Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Context
Figure 13-1 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.

Figure 13-1 Components of an OT terminal and a power cable

A. Heat-shrinkable tubing B. Bare crimping terminal C. Insulation D. Conductor

Procedure
Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of insulation coating C
to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in Figure 13-2. The recommended values
of L1 are listed in Table 13-6.

Figure 13-2 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

NOTICE
l When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
l If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is 1 mm (0.04 in.)
to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

Table 13-6 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 Cross-Sectional Value of L1
Sectional (mm(in.)) Area of Conductor (mm(in.))
Area of (mm2(in.2))
Conductor
(mm2(in.2))

1 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.015) 11 (0.43)

1.5 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

2.5 (0.004) 7 (0.28) 25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

4 (0.006) 8 (0.31) 35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

6 (0.009) 9 (0.35) 50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)

NOTE

If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the value of L1 by
comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.

Step 2 Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in Figure 13-3.

Figure 13-3 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal

Step 3 Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT terminal is in good
contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure 13-3.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

NOTICE
After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the conductor, or L2 in
Figure 13-3, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).

Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure
13-4.
NOTE

The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.

Figure 13-4 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor (OT
terminal)

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers the crimped part,
and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure 13-5.

Figure 13-5 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

NOTICE
Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the shrink tubing. Do
not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the insulation coating.

----End

Assembling the JG Terminal and Power Cable

Context
Figure 13-6 shows the components of a JG terminal and a power cable.

Figure 13-6 Components of a JG terminal and a power cable

A. JG terminal B. Heat-shrinkable tubing C. Insulation layer of a power D. Conductor of a power cable


cable

Procedure
Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L, as shown in
Figure 13-7. The recommended values of L are listed in Table 13-7.

NOTICE
l When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
l If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the value of L as
required.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-7 Stripping a power cable (JG terminal)

Table 13-7 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the value of L

Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm(in.))


(mm2(in.2))

16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)

Step 2 Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in Figure 13-8.

Figure 13-8 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal

Step 3 Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the bare crimping
terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power cable, as shown in Figure 13-8.

Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure
13-9.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-9 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor (JG
terminal)

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the crimped part, and
then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure 13-10.

Figure 13-10 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG terminal)

----End

Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable

Context
Figure 13-11 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-11 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable

A. Cord end terminal B. Insulation layer of a power cable C. Conductor of a power cable

Procedure
Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L1, as shown in
Figure 13-12. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 13-8.

NOTICE
When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.

Figure 13-12 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-8 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 Cross-Sectional Value of L1
Sectional (mm(in.)) Area of Conductor (mm(in.))
Area of (mm2(in.2))
Conductor
(mm2(in.2))

1 (0.002) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.015) 15 (0.59)

1.5 (0.002) 10 (0.39) 16 (0.025) 15 (0.59)

2.5 (0.004) 10 (0.39) 25 (0.039) 18 (0.71)

4 (0.006) 12 (0.47) 35 (0.054) 19 (0.75)

6 (0.009) 14 (0.55) 50 (0.077) 26 (1.02)

Step 2 Put the cord end terminal onto the conductor, and ensure that the conductor is aligned with the
edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in Figure 13-13.

NOTICE
After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of the conductor
must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).

Figure 13-13 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor

Step 3 Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 13-14.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-14 Crimping the cord end terminal and the conductor

Step 4 Check the maximum width of the tubular crimped terminal. The maximum width of a tubular
crimped terminal is listed in Table 13-9.

Table 13-9 Maximum width of a tubular crimped terminal


Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Crimped Terminal
Terminal (mm2(in.2)) W1 (mm(in.))

0.25 (0.0004) 1 (0.04)

0.5 (0.0008) 1 (0.04)

1.0 (0.0015) 1.5 (0.06)

1.5 (0.0023) 1.5 (0.06)

2.5 (0.0039) 2.4 (0.09)

4 (0.006) 3.1 (0.12)

6 (0.009) 4 (0.16)

10 (0.015) 5.3 (0.21)

16 (0.025) 6 (0.24)

25 (0.039) 8.7 (0.34)

35 (0.054) 10 (0.39)

----End

13.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables

Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Context
Figure 13-15 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded Ethernet cable.

Figure 13-15 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable

A. Jacket of connector B. Metal shell of connector C. Wire holder of D. Plug of connector


connector

E. Jacket of Ethernet cable F. Shield layer of Ethernet G. Twisted-pair wires -


cable

Procedure
Step 1 Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure 13-16.

Figure 13-16 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable

Step 2 Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine inside the
jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket, as shown in Figure 13-17.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

NOTICE
l When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer of the twisted-
pair cable.
l When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the twisted-pair cable.

Figure 13-17 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 3 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by the metal shell,
as shown in Figure 13-18.

Figure 13-18 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable

Step 4 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered completely.
Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield layer and ensure that there
is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-pair cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as
shown in Figure 13-19.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-19 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 5 Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in Figure 13-20
and Figure 13-21. Ensure that the colored wires are in the correct location in the cable.

Figure 13-20 Leading wires through the wire holder

G C

Figure 13-21 Cable locations in a wire holder

White-Orange
Orange

White-Green Blue
Green White-Blue

White-Brown
Brown

Step 6 Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 13-22. The connections
between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 13-23 and listed in Table 13-10.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-22 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder

Figure 13-23 Connections between wires and pins


White-Orange
Orange
White-Green
Blue
White-Blue
Green
White -Brown
Brown

Pin 8
Pin 1

Table 13-10 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as an
example)
Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

8 Brown

Step 7 Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown in Figure 13-24.

Figure 13-24 Cutting off surplus cables

Step 8 Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°, as shown in
Figure 13-25.
NOTE

Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.

Figure 13-25 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder

Step 9 Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the connector body
are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 13-26.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-26 Crimping the connector

Step 10 Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This completes the
assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 13-27.

Figure 13-27 Pushing the metal shell

Step 11 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat Step 1 through Step 10.

----End

Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Context
Figure 13-28 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-28 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable

A. Plug of connector B. Jacket C. Twisted-pair wires

Procedure
Step 1 Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure 13-29.

NOTICE
When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the twisted-pair cable.

Figure 13-29 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 2 Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure 13-30. The
connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table 13-11.

Figure 13-30 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))


C
White-Orange
Orange
White-Green
Blue
White-Blue
Green
Pin 8 White-Brown
Brown 16
Pin 1

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-11 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as an
example)

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

8 Brown

Step 3 Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 13-31.
NOTE

When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the cable is completely
seated in the plug.

Figure 13-31 Crimping the connector

Step 4 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat Step 1 through Step 3.

----End

Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips

Context
l To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors, the heights
and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

l The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than ± 5°. The top
margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector, with an offset of less than
± 10°.
l To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.
l The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic separators
must remain intact and be aligned.
l The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends of the wires
must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance between them must be less
than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check whether the contact
strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02 ± 0.13 mm (0.237 ± 0.005). If a
measuring tool is not available, you can compare the connector with a standard connector.
Figure 13-32 shows an unqualified piece, and Figure 13-33 shows a qualified piece.
NOTE

All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.

Figure 13-32 Contact strips of different heights

Figure 13-33 Contact strips of the same height

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Step 2 Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal contact strips.
Figure 13-34 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 13-34 Unparallel contact strips of different heights

Step 3 Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt cannot be
removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 13-35 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 13-35 Dirt on a contract strip

Step 4 Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned and intact. If a
separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 13-36
shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 13-36 Skewed plastic separators

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Step 5 Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you can see the
cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are in good contact with the edge
of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade extends beyond the ends of the wires and is
crimped with the wires. If not, replace the connector. Figure 13-37 shows an unqualified
piece.

Figure 13-37 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45

----End

Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables

Context
Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and crossover cables.
l Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used to connect
terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table 13-12 lists the
connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

Table 13-12 Connections of core wires in a straight-through cable


RJ45 Connector 1 RJ45 Connector 2 Core Wire Color Twisted or Not

2 2 Orange Twisted

1 1 Orange-White

6 6 Green Twisted

3 3 Green-White

4 4 Blue Twisted

5 5 Blue-White

8 8 Brown Twisted

7 7 Brown-White

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

l Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to connect
terminals such as two computers or switches. Table 13-13 lists the connections of core
wires in a crossover cable.

Table 13-13 Connections of core wires in a straight crossover cable


RJ45 Connector 1 RJ45 Connector 2 Core Wire Color Twisted or Not

6 2 Orange Twisted

3 1 Orange-White

2 6 Green Twisted

1 3 Green-White

4 4 Blue Twisted

5 5 Blue-White

8 8 Brown Twisted

7 7 Brown-White

Figure 13-38 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.

Figure 13-38 Pins of an RJ45 connector

Pin8
Pin1

Procedure
Step 1 Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester.

Step 2 After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators from 1 to G turn
on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally and the wires are correctly
connected.
NOTE

Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you can see the
indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 13-39.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-39 Testing the conduction and connections of wires

Step 3 Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal contact strips are in
good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as shown in Figure 13-40.

Figure 13-40 Checking the reliability

The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a straight-through
cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn on, which depends on the wire
connections of a crossover cable.
The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following sequence:
At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of 1-8-G. At the
slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.
If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is unqualified.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

NOTE

If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as shown in Figure 13-41.

Figure 13-41 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable

----End

13.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories

Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories

Tools
NOTE

The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation methods are the
same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors have separate interfaces. In the
actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on equipment.

Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation procedure
described here.

Bending Radius
Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the requirements
listed in Table 13-14.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-14 Bending radius of cables or fibers


Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)

Ordinary cable In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the cable is


connected with a connector, R ≥ 5d.

Fiber R ≥ 40 mm (1.57 in.); Bending angle > 90°

NOTE

The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.

Precautions for Installation


l Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when installing or
removing cable components.
l Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a dedicated tool to
pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you check that the pins are
inserted properly.
l Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are properly
connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force using a flat-head or
Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric screwdriver. If the screw cannot
be screwed into the tapped hole, determine the reason and try again. Do not apply too
much force, or the screw or adapter may be damaged.
l When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated pliers such as
cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
l Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.
l Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before using the
fiber connectors.

Requirements for Cable Routing


l To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install protective rings
in the holes.
l To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After connecting
multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep the cables slack to avoid
generating stress.
l Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.
l Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.
l Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
l To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power modules
separately.

Installing Power Adapters

Installing the OT Terminal

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Procedure
l Install an OT terminal.
a. Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting hole, as
shown in Figure 13-42.

Figure 13-42 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole

NOTE

When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in Figure 13-43,
where A is correct and B is incorrect.

Figure 13-43 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of crimping sleeve

b. Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw, and fasten
it clockwise, as shown in Figure 13-44.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-44 Installing two terminals back to back

NOTICE
Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or metal
components.

c. Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in Figure
13-45.

Figure 13-45 Installed OT terminal

l Install two OT terminals on a post.

Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals can be
installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a large contact area.
Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these methods:

– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in Figure 13-46.
– Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 13-47.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-46 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle

Figure 13-47 Crossing two terminals

NOTICE
If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the bigger one. A
maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post.

l To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

----End

Installing the Cord End Terminal

Procedure
Step 1 Hold a cord end terminal upright and place it on a terminal jack, as shown in Figure 13-48.
To ensure bump contact and dense connection, place the plain side of the terminal outwards.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-48 Placing a terminal on a terminal jack vertically

Step 2 Insert the terminal into the jack vertically, and turn the screw clockwise to fasten the terminal,
as shown in Figure 13-49.

Figure 13-49 Feeding the terminal into the jack

NOTICE
l Ensure that the exposed section of the terminal is less than 2 mm (0.079 in.) in length.
l Do not press the insulation of the terminal.
l Insert only one terminal into one jack.

Step 3 Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected.

Step 4 Before you remove a cord end terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

----End

Installing Ethernet Adapters

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female connector, as
shown in Figure 13-50.

Figure 13-50 Holding the male and female shielded connectors

Step 2 Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-51.

Figure 13-51 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded connector

Step 3 When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port. (The clip on the
cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull the connector slightly and
ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in Figure 13-52.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-52 Installed shielded Ethernet connector

Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector, as shown
in Figure 13-53.

Figure 13-53 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector

----End

Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female connector, as
shown in Figure 13-54.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-54 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors

Step 2 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-55.

Figure 13-55 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded connector

Step 3 A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the connector
slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 13-56 shows an installed Ethernet
connector.

Figure 13-56 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector, as shown
in Figure 13-57.

Figure 13-57 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector

----End

Installing Fiber Connectors

Context

NOTICE
l After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and install them as
soon as possible.
l When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the connectors
are densely installed.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors

Procedure
Step 1 Clean the pins of a fiber connector by using lint-free cotton and alcohol.

Step 2 Clean the pins again by using dust-free cotton. If necessary, clean the pins by using an air gun.
Ensure that the pins are free from any fiber or debris.

----End

Installing an FC Fiber Connector

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in
Figure 13-58.

Figure 13-58 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the male connector until
it is completely seated in the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-59.

Figure 13-59 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely installed, as shown
in Figure 13-60.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-60 Fastening the locking nut

Step 5 To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut counterclockwise, and gently
pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 13-61.

Figure 13-61 Disassembling an FC fiber connector

----End

Installing an LC Fiber Connector

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in
Figure 13-62.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-62 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male connector until it is
completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in Figure 13-63.

Figure 13-63 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in Figure 13-64.

Figure 13-64 Installed LC connector

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Step 5 To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the locking clips from
the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 13-65.

Figure 13-65 Disassembling an LC fiber connector

----End

Installing the SC Fiber Connector

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future use.
Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in
Figure 13-66.

Figure 13-66 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding the shell of the
fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the fiber connector is secured by the
clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the figure). Pull the fiber connector gently. If the
connector does not loosen, the installation is complete. See Figure 13-67.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-67 Installed SC fiber connector

Step 4 To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not hold the fiber)
and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the adapter. Unlock the male
connector, and then separate it from the shell, as shown in Figure 13-68.

Figure 13-68 Disassembling an SC fiber connector

----End

Installing an MPO Connector

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in
Figure 13-69.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-69 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female connector until
you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors are securely installed, as shown in
Figure 13-70.

Figure 13-70 Installed MPO fiber connector

Step 4 To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and remove the male
connector, as shown in Figure 13-71.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-71 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector

----End

13.2.5 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening screws
counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 13-72.

Figure 13-72 Loosening two fastening screws

Step 2 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking mechanism. The jaw
of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as shown in Figure 13-73.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-73 Pliers jaw opening automatically

Step 3 Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 13-74.

Figure 13-74 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools

Step 4 Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and align the screw
holes, as shown in Figure 13-75.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-75 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool

NOTICE
Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the teeth of the mold
aligning from the larger size to the smaller size.

Step 5 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and the jaw
completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 13-76.

Figure 13-76 Aligning the screw holes

Step 6 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two fastening
screws clockwise. Figure 13-77 and Figure 13-78shows the mold installed in the COAX
crimping tool.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-77 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool

Figure 13-78 An installed mold

----End

13.3 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device


Operation

13.3.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room

Requirements for Selecting a Site for an Equipment Room


When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and technical
requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological, seismic, power
supply, and transportation factors.
Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-proof
construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized construction designers
to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The equipment room should also follow
local regulations concerning the industrial construction, environmental protection, fire safety,

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

and civil air defense. Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and
other requirements.
The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature, dust, toxic
gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment room away from
significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer stations.
The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as follows:
l The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from heavy pollution
sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located at a distance of at least 3.7
km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources such as chemical, rubber, and
galvanization factories. It should be located at a distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from
light pollution sources such as packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources
cannot be avoided, ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In
addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.
l The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the livestock
farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as the equipment room.
l The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment room that is
not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment room construction
standards to avoid noise pollution.
l The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.
l The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt lake.
Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities. In addition,
alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material. Otherwise, equipment suitable
for wet conditions must be used.
l The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to maintain an
airtight room.
l Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.
l No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on the walls or
windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that they are smooth, wear-
resistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated, heat absorptive, and have
electromagnetic shielding.
l The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes, big cesspools
and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive pressure state to prevent
corrosive gases from entering the equipment room and corroding components and circuit
boards.
l It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this requirement
cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the room should be at least 600
mm (23.62 in,) above the maximum flood level.
l The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.
l The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is unavoidable, the
doors and windows of the equipment room must not face pollution sources.
l Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow directly on the
equipment because condensation may be blown into the equipment.
l Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.

Equipment Room Layout


An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment, telecommunications
equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary equipment. To ensure easy

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

maintenance and management, place the equipment in different rooms. Figure 13-79 shows
the layout of the equipment room.

Figure 13-79 Layout of the equipment room

Control room Generator room

Transmission Main communication Power distribution


Battery room
room equipment room room

Substation room

Communication cable and optical cable


Power cable

The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:


l It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication cables and
power cables.
l It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance, reduces
potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.

Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room


Table 13-15 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room.

Table 13-15 Construction requirements for the equipment room

Item Requirements

Area The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the
equipment with the largest capacity.

Net height The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less than 3 m
(9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room is the net height
below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

Floor The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and


dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended. Cover
the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal tolerance of each
square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08 in.). If raised floors are
unavailable, use a static-electricity-conductive floor material, with a
volume resistivity of 1.0 x 107 ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms. Ground this
floor material or raised floor. You can connect them to ground using a
one megohm current-limiting resistor and connection line.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Item Requirements

Load-bearing The floor must bear loads larger than 150 kg/m2 (0.21 bf/in.2).
capacity

Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high and 1 m
windows (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and windows with
dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in the windows and seal
them tightly.

Wall surface Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use pulverized
treatment paint.

Cable trays Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable trays must
be smooth. The reserved length and width of the cable trays, and the
number, position and dimensions of the holes must comply with the
requirements of device arrangement.

Water pipe Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through the
equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the equipment room, but
place it in the corridor or near the staircase.

Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the equipment
partition wall room door. The partition wall can block some outside dust.

Installation Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly on
position of the equipment.
air conditioner

Other Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like mice).
requirements

Figure 13-80 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Equipment Room Environment


Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for connectors or
metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of devices and cause faults.
The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-permeable, and
corrosive dust. Table 13-16 lists the requirement for dust concentration in the equipment
room.

Table 13-16 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room


Mechanical active Unit Concentration
material

Dust particle Particle /m3 ≤ 3x 104


(no visible dust accumulated
on a workbench in three
days)

Suspending dust mg/m3 ≤0.2

Precipitable dust mg/m2·h ≤1.5

Description
l Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm
l Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm
l 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm

Take the following measures to meet the requirements:


l Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.
l Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows should be dust-
proof.
l Clean the equipment room regularly and clean the air filter monthly.
l Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.

Requirements for Corrosive Gases


The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and NH3. Table
13-17 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.

Table 13-17 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration


Chemical active
material Unit Concentration

SO2 mg/m3 ≤0.20

H2S mg/m3 ≤0.006

NH3 mg/m3 ≤0.05

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Chemical active
material Unit Concentration

Cl2 mg/m3 ≤0.01

Take the following measures to meet the requirements:


l Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas concentration is high,
such as a chemical plant.
l Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction from any
pollution source.
l Place batteries in different rooms.
l A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.

Requirements for ESD Prevention


The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V.

Take the following measures to meet this requirement:


l Train operators about ESD prevention.
l Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact of static
electricity.
l Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.
l Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.
l Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.
l Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals. Use ESD
worktables.
l Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least 30 cm (11.81
in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.

Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room


All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause equipment problems
with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, and common
impedance (including grounding system) coupling. Prevent the interference using these
approaches:

l Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply system.
l Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for surge
protection. Separate them as far as possible.
l Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units, and high-
frequency and high-current equipment.
l Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.

Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding


Table 13-18 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-18 Requirements for lightning proof grounding


Item Requirements

Capital l Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room.


construction l Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside the room.
l The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding body with
the protective ground of the room.

Power cables l After the low-voltage power cables are led into the room, install the
leading in the surge protector for the power cables in the AC voltage stabilizer and
equipment room the AC power distribution panel (box). Correctly ground the surge
need to be protector nearby.
equipped with a l For an equipment room in urban area, install a power supply surge
surge protector protector with the nominal discharge current of no less than 20 kA.
For an equipment room that is built in a suburb and subject to
lightning strikes, install a power supply surge protector with the
nominal discharge current of more than 60 kA. For an equipment
room that is built in a mountain area and subject to frequent
lightning strikes, or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a
power supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current of
more than 100 kA.
l The ground cable of the surge protector should be no longer than 1
m (3.28 ft).

Grounding for l Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V DC
DC power power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power supply)
distribution with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The total ground
cable should meet the maximum load of the equipment.
l The power equipment must have a DC working ground cable, which
can connect the power equipment to the collective ground cable of
the telecommunication site (or the protective ground bar of the
equipment room).

Equipotential l Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the room such
connection as mobile base station, transmission, switching equipment, power
supply equipment, and cable distribution frame. Connect all PGND
cables to the collective protective ground bar. Connect all PGND
cables in one equipment room to one protective ground bar.
l Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective ground
of devices, which means the two share one grounding network.
l The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal door or
window of the equipment should be grounded for protection.

General l Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with the
requirements for protective ground of any telecom equipment in the equipment room.
grounding l Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
l All ground cables should be as short as possible, and arranged in a
straight line.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Item Requirements

Grounding l The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.


resistance l The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7 m (2.30
ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the grounding body below
the frozen ground.
l Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure effective
grounding.

Routing of l Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the equipment room.
signal cable All signal cables must be led into the site underground.
l Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a metal pipe if
they come out/in the equipment room.
l Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment room.
l Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not deploy
outdoor aerial cables.
l Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge protection
devices.

Collective l Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground cable.
ground cable l Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt measures to
prevent electrification corrosion when connecting different metal
parts together.
l Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a cross-
sectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or use the
galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate the collective
ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars of the building.

Grounding lead- The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42 ft) long.
in Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area of 40 mm x 4
mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm (1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Item Requirements

Grounding of the l All the devices including the surge protection device in the cabinet
cabinet must be connected in an equipotential manner. The ground cables
can be aggregated to the ground bar or surge protector socket first,
and then the ground bar or surge protector socket can be connected
to the ground.
l The resistance between the device ground terminals and ground bar
cannot exceed 0.1 ohm.
l The cabinet can be grounded using the protecting earthing (PE) wire
of the electrical network in the building, zinc-coated angle steel, or
the main steel bar of the building.
l If the cabinet is grounded using the PE wire of the electrical
network, use a multimeter to test the grounding status. If the voltage
between the PE wire and neutral wire is lower than 5 V and the
voltage between the PE wire and live wire is about 220 V, the PE
wire is grounded well. If the tested AC voltages are not within the
ranges, the cabinet must be grounded in other ways.
l The yellow-green ground cable contains multiple copper wires. The
cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be no less than 6 mm2
(0.0093 in.2) and the length cannot exceed 3 m (9.84 ft.).
l Ground cables cannot be twisted with signal cables.
l Antirust and anticorrosion measures must be taken on the ground
terminals.
l The fiber reinforcing rib can be directly connected to the ground bar
of the cabinet. Before wrapping the reinforcing rib with insulation
tape, cut a 0.5 m (1.64 ft.) segment from the reinforcing rib. Wrap
the reinforcing rib with at least five layers of insulation tape. Keep
the reinforcing rib at least 5 cm (1.969 in.) from the cabinet surface.

13.3.2 Requirements for Power Supply

Requirements for AC Power Supply


An AC power supply system consists of power mains, uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs),
and self-supplied electric generators. In addition to meeting the requirements of the server
load, the AC power supply must have a simple connection line, safe operation, flexible
scheduling, and easy maintenance.
The low-voltage power supply should be 3-phase, 5-wire mode or monophase 3-wire mode.
This AC power supply should be 110 V/220 V, with a frequency of 50 Hz.
The UPS should supply the same power and operate at the same phase as the power mains.
The switching time between the UPS and mains should be less than 10 ms; otherwise, the
networking devices will reboot or reset.
For power distribution capacity in the equipment room, both the working current and fault
current of the devices should be considered. Ensure that independent AC power supplies

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

protect independent devices. Configure the current-carrying capacity of the protection switch
of the equipment room for more than that of the devices.

Table 13-19 lists the voltage range of the AC power supply for the devices.

Table 13-19 Voltage range of AC power supply


Item Requirements

AC power capacity to -10% to +5% of the rated voltage


support the devices

AC power capacity to -15% to +10% of the rated voltage


support the power modules
and important buildings

Frequency of alternating -4% to +4% of the rated value


current

Voltage wave shape sine Within 5% of the rated voltage


distortion

The automated electric generator must have a standard interface that supports
telecommunication protocols, remote telecommunication, monitoring, and control.

AC power cables should meet the following specifications:


l AC neutral should have a conductor with the same cross section as the phase line.
l AC cables should have non-flammable insulation. The layout of AC cables should
comply with local regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms should comply
with local regulations.

Recommendations for AC Power Supply


The following are recommendations for the AC power supply.
l If the voltage of the power mains that supply power directly to devices exceeds the rated
voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage range that devices can support, a voltage
regulating device or voltage stabilizing device is required.
l If the mains do not supply power for the device directly, or if the mains voltage exceeds
the rated voltage by -15% to 10% or exceeds the input voltage range of the DC power
supply, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device is required.
l A UPS or inverter power supply system is required to provide uninterrupted AC power
to support the telecommunication load.
l If abnormalities occur on the mains, telecommunication servers should be equipped with
a self-supplied electric generator to support the key telecommunication load. The
capacity should be not less than 150% to 200% of the total uninterruptible power supply.
l Storage batteries are usually installed in a parallel connection of two groups. UPS
storage batteries are generally installed in one group. The redundancy required for the
UPS can rely on concatenation or parallel connection. When an inverter or a UPS is
used, the active inverter is determined by the maximum power and a backup inverter is
required.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Requirements for DC Power Supply


The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the power
equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder as short as
possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop voltage drop from the
battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2 V.

l A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on each floor to
supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on the respective floor.
l A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for centralized
power supply or use distributed power supply systems.
l A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its equipment
room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released from batteries from
eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.

Table 13-20 lists the specifications for the DC power supply.

Table 13-20 Specifications for the DC power supply

Item Requirements

DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current


capacity to
support the surge
current

Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the rated
voltage precision value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to 100% of the rated
value, the output voltage of the rectifier ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V,
with the regulated voltage precision less than or equal to 1%.

Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%


amplitude of
switch on/off

Peak noise ≤200 mV


voltage

Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the range of
response the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.

Recommendations for DC Power Supply


The following are recommendations for the DC power supply.
l Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems and put
power equipment in multiple locations.
l Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the
communications equipment within the required range.
l Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary capacity of
storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of storage batteries if it is
difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply system.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

l The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the power of the
communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or fewer active rectifier
modules, configure one backup module. If there are more than 10 active modules,
configure one backup module for every 10 active modules.
l Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by the
duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most offices, the
batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.

13.4 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications

13.4.1 General Grounding Specifications


Table 13-21 shows the general grounding specifications.

Table 13-21 General grounding specifications


No. Description

1 The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded ground and the
lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame should share the same
grounding conductor.

2 The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows in the
equipment room should be grounded for protection.

3 The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in normal
conditions should be grounded for protection.

4 The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground bar of the
equipment room.

5 Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical connection.

13.4.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room


The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be less than or
equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary communication office should be
less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in an area where the earth resistance rate is high
should be less than 10 ohms.

13.4.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices


Table 13-22 lists the equipment grounding specifications.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-22 Equipment Grounding Specifications


No. Description

1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base stations,
transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in the equipment room
should be grounded for protection. Connect all protective ground for various
devices jointly to a general ground bar, and then to the same protective ground bar
in the room together with the protective ground (PGND) of the device.

2 The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar provided by the
customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a yellow-green plastic
insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-sectional area greater than 25 sq.
mm (0.039 sq. in.).

3 There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of the front
door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the grounding terminals
of the cabinet framework through connection cables with cross-sectional area of no
less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq. in.).

4 Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No insulating
coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal components.

5 Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and gaskets on
the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a rectangular area measuring
30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around the connection hole for a captive bolt.
Measures to prevent rust and corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc
electroplating with iridescent yellow chromate conversion coating should be
applied to the gasket and nut to ensure good electrical contact.

6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are required to
connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The cross-sectional area of the
short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq. in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8
in.) long. Connect the two ends of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar
terminals of neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.

13.4.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power


Supply

Table 13-23 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies.

Table 13-23 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies


No. Description

1 The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be equipped with a
surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal discharge current no less than 20
kA.

2 The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication equipment
share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and the equipment are in
the same equipment room, use the same protective ground bar for them if possible.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

No. Description

3 Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.

4 The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V DC power
supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power supply.

5 The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply equipment
should use the same grounding conductor with the protective ground of the
switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment are in the same
equipment room, use the same protection ground bar for them if possible.

6 Add surge protection on the DC power interface.

13.4.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

Table 13-24 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.

Table 13-24 Grounding specifications for signal cables

No. Description

1 Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both ends, or
connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground bar of the equipment
room. For cables inside the equipment room, install surge protection devices at the
interface to the equipment. The PGND cable for the surge protection devices
should be as short as possible.

2 The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and unused wires
inside the cable should be grounded for protection.

3 The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when going out of the office.
The cable's shield layer should be connected to the protective ground of the MDF.
The MDF should use the same grounding conductor as the cabinet.

4 Do not route signal cables overhead.

13.4.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables

Table 13-25 shows the specifications for the ground cable.

Table 13-25 Specifications for laying out ground cables

No. Description

1 The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

No. Description

2 Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground cables
overhead.

3 Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add any switches
or fuses.

4 The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic insulated one
with a copper core.

5 The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the protective
ground of transmission and communication equipment in the equipment room.

6 A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more than 45 m


(147.64 ft).

13.5 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables


An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and maintenance after the
installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and orderly connection of cables, and easy
maintenance after installation.
Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables:
l Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.
l Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables.

NOTE

Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the equipment room.
Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.

13.5.1 Introduction to Labels

Label Materials
Features:
l Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
l Color: chalk white
l Material: polyester (PET)
l Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)
l Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker
l Pass UL and CSA authentication

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Type and Structure

Label for Signal Cables


The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure 13-81.

Figure 13-81 Label for signal cables

To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label. For
example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis number, and
another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each dividing line is light blue
(Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02 in.).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is 1 mm x 2
mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.).
The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label is used to
identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Power Cable Label


The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the cable ties that
are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm
(0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and the area in the middle is for
affixing the label, as shown in Figure 13-82.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-82 Power cable label

Label Printing
The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of
high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.

Template for Printing


You can obtain a template from the Huawei local office to print labels.
The template is made in Microsoft Word. Follow these instructions to use the template:
l You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of centered
characters, direction, and fonts.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

l If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure that the
printouts are clear and legible.

Merging Cells in the Template


To merge two or more cells, do as follows:
1. Select Edit/Select All.
2. Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge Cells.

Requirements on the Printer


To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up the page and
try printing.
1. Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper over the
whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup conforms to the label
layout.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have been set
correctly.
– If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the label paper.
– If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing again until
the correct printout is produced.

The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows.


1. Select File/Page Setup.
2. Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.
3. Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the values of Top,
Bottom, Left, and Right.
NOTE

If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 13-83 appears before printing, click Ignore to continue
the printing.

Figure 13-83 Warning prompt before printing

After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page setup is only
necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Requirements for Feeding the Printer


The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing procedures such
as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use, feed in the labels one page
at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the auto-feed mode.
Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in a correct
position.

Requirements for the Printed Label


Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:
l All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the backing layer
of the label page.
l Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout, the
dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed characters.
l When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid covering
the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move the text to the next
line.

Writing Labels

Writing Tools
To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of ball-point pens
to write the labels.
If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not recommended.
Compared with ball-point pens, water-proof markers are better. When writing with a ball-
point pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may contaminate the label and blur the
words.

NOTE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

Font
For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in Table 13-26
(Times New Roman).

Table 13-26 Standard typeface for handwriting


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z

Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and ensure that the
characters are distinct and tidy.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 13-84.

Figure 13-84 Placement of text on a label

Attaching Labels
After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to the signal
cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for attaching labels are
described in the following sections.

Label for Signal Cables


l Choose the place to attach labels.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In special
cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables), other positions are
allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with text is attached facing right or
downward, as shown in Figure 13-85. The details are as follows:
– The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
– The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable
horizontally.

Figure 13-85 Text area of the label

l Procedure for attaching labels


Figure 13-86 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-86 Label for signal cables

Power Cable Label


Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate on the cable
tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the identification plate, and
attached to only one side of the identification plate. The cable ties are bundled at 2 cm (0.79
in.) from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the finished
identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side of
the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 13-87. The details are as follows:
l The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
l The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make sure that the
label is facing out.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-87 Binding the label for the power cable

Cable
TO:

B03
TO:
B03 -48V2

-48V2
Cable

The identification card is on the The identification card is to


top of the cable in horizontal the right of the cable in
cabling. vertical cabling.

Contents of Engineering Labels

Contents of Labels for Power Cables


Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates. On the labels,
there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the location of the device on the
other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, distribution box or power socket.

Contents of Labels for Signal Cables


The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the location of
the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 13-88 shows the information on both
sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables.
l Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
l Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the opposite end of the
cable.
l Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.

Figure 13-88 Printed parts on the label for signal cables

Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the right side of the
cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the location information of the
opposite end; and the other side carries the location information of the local end.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2
at the other end of the cable.

Precautions for Using Engineering Labels


When using labels, pay attention to the following points:
l When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
l Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and ink pens
cannot be used to print and write labels.
l Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are pasted at
incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of the device is affected.
l Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables, with
identification plates on the same side.
l The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint of the
engineering person who is working on the label.

13.5.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers

These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards
in a chassis, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for optical cables:
l One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.
l The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices

Meaning of the Label


Table 13-27 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers that
connect two devices.

Table 13-27 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered
R/T number from A to Z.
N: The cabinet columns from left to right are numbered
from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and column
01.

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for


number example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order starting


number from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot at the top left
of the chassis.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Content Meaning Example

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order, consistent


interface with the port sequence number on the device.
number.

R: Receiving -
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

Example of the Label


Figure 13-89 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

Figure 13-89 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices

A01 01 05 01 R

T 01 01 01 G01
TO:

The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 13-89.


l "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected to the
optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in
the machine room.
l "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is connected with
optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row G, column 01
in the machine room.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF

Meaning of the Labels


Table 13-28 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber between a
device and an optical distribution frame (ODF).

Table 13-28 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF
Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet For example, A01.


R/T number

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for


number example, 01.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Content Meaning Example

C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order starting


number from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot at the top left
of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order, consistent


interface with the port sequence number on the device.
number.

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

ODF-MN-B- MN: row M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered
C-R/T number and from A to Z.
column number N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
of an ODF numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and column
01.

B: row number Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.


of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal device

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

Example of the Label


Figure 13-90 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

Figure 13-90 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF

ODF G01 01 01 R

R 01 05 01 A01
TO:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Meaning of the label in Figure 13-90


l "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected to the
optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF in row G, column 01 in the
machine room.
l "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is connected to
optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in
the machine room.

13.5.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables

Applicable Ranges
The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.

Label Content
Table 13-29 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet cables.

You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the device is not
installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet number.

Table 13-29 Information on the Ethernet cables


Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for


number example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and left-


number right order. For example, 01.

D: network port Numbered in top-down and left-right orders. For


number example, 01.

MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02 is the second cabinet in row B.
number

Z: Location Fill in the location number of the terminal device


number on site. If the cable is connected to a device in a
cabinet, specify the serial numbers of the cabinet,
the chassis, and the Ethernet interface of the device.
For example, B02-03-12. If the cable is connected
to the Network Management Station (NMS),
specify the specific location of the NMS.

The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or agents and the
network cables for other purposes should be specified according to actual connections. The
details are as follows:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

l For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end should
indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides, and the serial
number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate the number of the
chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the device is a standalone device,
provide the specific position of the device.
l For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on the agent or
terminal end should contain the serial number of the network interface. The definitions
of the cabinet number and chassis number are the same as those described in Table
13-29.
l If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should contain
specific location information that identifies the hub.
The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or terminal, and the
location of the standalone device should be specified according to actual connections.

Label Example
Figure 13-91 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable.

Figure 13-91 Sample label on an Ethernet cable

A01 03 01 01

01 03 B02
TO:

Meaning of the label in Figure 13-91.


l "A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to network
interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment
room.
l "B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to network
interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the equipment room. No
slot number is given.

13.5.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables


Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on the device
and main distribution frame (MDF).

Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables


Table 13-30 shows the contents of the labels.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Table 13-30 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables


Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: frame number Numbered in the bottom-up order with two digits,


for example, 03.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and left-


number right order. For example, 01.

D: cable number Numbered with two digits in top-down and left-


right order. For example, 01.

MDF-MN-B-C MN: row number M: The rows of cabinets from front to back are
and column numbered from A to Z. N: The columns of cabinets
number of the from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For
MDF example, G01 is the MDF of Row G and Column
01.

B: row number of Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.


the terminal
device

C: column number
of the terminal
device

Example of the Label


Figure 13-92 shows a sample label on a user cable.

Figure 13-92 Sample label on a user cable

A01 03 01 01

01 01 MDF G01
TO:

The meaning of the label in Figure 13-92 is as follows:


l "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to port 1 in
slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.
l "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is connected to the
terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column 01 in the equipment room.

13.5.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables


These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for cabinets,
including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables also include power
cables and PGND cables.
The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable
ties. For details of the labels, see Table 13-31.

Table 13-31 Contents of the label


Content Meaning

MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.


B--48Vn B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for
example, 01.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND N: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-up and left-
to-right orders.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the cabinet.
PGND
On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column number
of the power distribution equipment like a control cabinet and
distribution box, and BC identifies the row and column number of the
-48 V connector. If there is no row number or column number, or the
connector can be identified without them, BC can be omitted. It is
unnecessary to identify the row and column number for BGND and
PGND.

The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the power cable
whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the label only carries location
information about the opposite equipment, the control cabinet, or the distribution box. Table
13-31 lists the information on two -48 V power supplies on the label. The information on
other DC voltages, such as 24 V and 60 V should be given in similar methods.
Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are
bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the text on
the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction. For details, see Figure 13-93.

Figure 13-93 Example of the labels for DC power cables

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

The meaning of the label in Figure 13-93 is as follows:


l On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates that the
cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B of -48 V bus bar
in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment room.
l On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is -48 V DC
supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the equipment room.

NOTE

In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission equipment room,
every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric identification. For example, in the above
label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8") is the numeric identification of the terminal block.

PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-circuited.
Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It is only necessary to
give the row and column of the power distribution box, instead of giving the specific serial
number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on the loaded
cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND
copper bar in the power distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room.
Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.

Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables


These labels are affixed to both ends of an AC power cable that provides AC power supply to
cabinets, including 110/220 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The 110/220 V AC cables and
related PGND and BGND cables are covered with an insulating sheath, so the labels need to
contain only the word "AC" and the cabinet numbers.

The labels for AC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable
ties. For details, see Table 13-32.

Table 13-32 Label content

Content Meaning

MN-(B)-ACn MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the power is led
in
B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for
example, 01.
n: power port number, numbered as 1 to 3 in bottom-up and left-to-right
order.
Serial number of the socket where the power is led in: the location of
the socket is marked according to the actual situation. If the sockets can
be identified by row numbers and column numbers, they can be
numbered following the same rule for the cabinets. If the sockets
cannot be identified by rows and columns, specify the detailed
locations to avoid confusion with other sockets.

The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment and the power
socket; information about the local end is unnecessary.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are
bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the text on
the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction, as shown in Figure 13-94.

Figure 13-94 Labels for AC power cables

Label on the loaded cabinet side Label on the distribution box side
(indicating the position of the cable (indicating the position of the cable
on the power distribution box) on the loaded cabinet side)

Meaning of the label in Figure 13-94.


l On the equipment cabinet side, the label marked "A01-AC1" indicates that the power
cable is connected to the first AC power socket of row A and column 01 in the
equipment room.
l On the power socket side, the label marked "B01-AC1" indicates that the power cable is
connected to the first AC power socket in the cabinet of row B and column 01 in the
equipment room.

13.6 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules

Common Faults of an Optical Module


1. An optical module is not completely installed in position.
If the optical module is not completely installed in position and the latch boss is not
secured, the device cannot identify the optical module. After the optical module works
for a long time, it will be ejected under external stress.
2. The optical receptacle on an optical module is contaminated.
If an optical module is not cleaned or protected properly, contaminants may accumulate
on the fiber pin in the optical module. As a result, the coupling efficiency is reduced,
optical signals are cut off, or even worse, the surface of the fiber pin is damaged
permanently.
3. An optical module is burnt.
If high-power optical signals (caused by an optical time domain reflectometer or self-
loop test) are transmitted through an optical module that is used for long-distance
transmission but no optical attenuator is used, the optical power will exceed the overload
power of the avalanche photodiode (APD). Then the optical module is burnt.

The preceding faults lead to temporary or long-term cut-off of optical signals; or even cause
permanent damages to the optical module, affecting communication services.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Measures to Prevent a Loosened Optical Module


1. When installing an optical module, insert it in position. If you hear a click or feel a slight
shake, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
If the latch boss is not secured, the gold finger of the optical module is not in good
contact with the connector on the board. In this case, the link may be connected but
optical signals will be cut off or the optical module will be loosened when the optical
module is shaken or hit.
2. Figure 13-95 shows the release handle on an optical module when it is open and closed.
When inserting the optical module, make sure that the release handle is closed. At this
time, the latch boss locks the optical module. After the optical module is inserted, try
pulling it out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical module cannot be pulled
out, it is secured.

Figure 13-95 State of the release handle

Close the release handle Open the release handle

Measures to Prevent Receptacle Contamination


1. Cleaning tissues must be prepared on site. You need to clean the optical connector before
inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the receptacle against contamination on the
surface of the optical connector.

Figure 13-96 Cleaning optical fibers with special cleaning tissues

NOTE

Place at least three cleaning tissues on the work bench. As shown in Figure 13-96, wipe the end of
an optical connector from left to right or from right to left on a cleaning tissue, and then move the
connector end to the unused part of the cleaning tissue to continue.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

2. Cover an unused optical module with a protective cap to prevent dust, as shown in
Figure 13-97.

Figure 13-97 Installing a protective cap

If no protective cap is available, use fibers to protect the optical module, as shown in
Figure 13-98.

Figure 13-98 Using fibers to protect an optical module

3. Cover unused optical connectors with protective caps, as shown in Figure 13-99, and
then lay out fibers on the fiber rack or coil them in a fiber management tray to prevent
fibers from being squeezed.

Figure 13-99 Installing a protective cap on a fiber

4. If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and is not
covered with a protective cap, you need to clean it before using it. Clean a receptacle
with a cotton swab, as shown in Figure 13-100. Clean an optical connector with cleaning
tissues.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Figure 13-100 Cleaning a receptacle with a cotton swab

NOTICE
When cleaning a receptacle, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the receptacle.
Do not use too much strength because the receptacle may be damaged.

5. If optical signals are lost during the operation of a device, use the preceding method to
clean the receptacle or the optical connector. In this manner, the possibility of
contamination can be excluded.

Measures to Prevent an Optical Module from Being Burnt


1. Before using an optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR) to test the connectivity or the
attenuation of optical signals, disconnect the optical fibers from the optical module.
Otherwise, the optical module will be burnt.
2. When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen the optical
connector instead of the optical attenuator.

Precautions
1. The optical connector should be vertically inserted in the receptacle to avoid damages to
the receptacle.
2. Fibers must be inserted into optical modules of the corresponding type. That is,
multimode fibers must be inserted into multimode optical modules, and single mode
fibers must be inserted into single mode optical modules. If a fiber is inserted into an
optical module of a different mode, faults may occur. For example, optical signals will
be lost.

13.7 Appendix G Fault Tag


*Customer name:

Address:

Contact person:

Tel.: Fax:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
S9300&S9300E Series Switches
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 13 Appendix

Category*: □ RMA □ Return □ Analysis

Fault Description
BOM Product Bar Occurring of the Fault Category Software
Code Description Code* Date* Phenomena* No.* Version*

Reasons for Repairing (Category No.):

Category No. includes the following eight types:


F001 - Wear out damaged (◊ In warranty Period ◊ Out of warranty period)
F002 - Deployment damaged
F003 - Intransit damaged
F004 - Version upgrade
F005 - Batch replace
F007 - Overdue spare parts inspecting
F008 - Others
F011 - Running circumstance change

Note:
l For optical interface cards returned, the optical interfaces should be covered with
protection caps.
l In general, the analysis card will not be returned to you. If you have any special
requirements, please contact Huawei.
l One Fault Tag should be adapted in one return category, such as RMA/Return/Analysis.
l The items marked with "*" are the mandatory fields that you must fill in.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai